 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| User's Manual ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.20 or Later Operation (WindowsTM Based) Target Devices 78K/0 Series 78K/0S Series Document No. U14910EJ1V0UM00 (1st edition) Date Published October 2000 N CP(K) 2000 (c) 1997 Printed in Japan [MEMO] 2 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation. Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 3 * The information in this document is current as of October, 2000. The information is subject to change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC's data sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC semiconductor products. Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC sales representative for availability and additional information. * No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior written consent of NEC. NEC assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. * NEC does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC semiconductor products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC or others. * Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these circuits, software and information in the design of customer's equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of customer. NEC assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information. * While NEC endeavours to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC semiconductor products, customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC semiconductor products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as redundancy, fire-containment, and anti-failure features. * NEC semiconductor products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to semiconductor products developed based on a customer-designated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of a semiconductor product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each semiconductor product before using it in a particular application. "Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment and industrial robots "Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed for life support) "Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc. The quality grade of NEC semiconductor products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC's data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC semiconductor products in applications not intended by NEC, they must contact an NEC sales representative in advance to determine NEC's willingness to support a given application. (Note) (1) "NEC" as used in this statement means NEC Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries. (2) "NEC semiconductor products" means any semiconductor product developed or manufactured by or for NEC (as defined above). M8E 00. 4 4 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 Regional Information Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC product in your application, pIease contact the NEC office in your country to obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify: * * * * * Device availability Ordering information Product release schedule Availability of related technical literature Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth) Network requirements * In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary from country to country. NEC Electronics Inc. (U.S.) Santa Clara, California Tel: 408-588-6000 800-366-9782 Fax: 408-588-6130 800-729-9288 NEC Electronics (Germany) GmbH Benelux Office Eindhoven, The Netherlands Tel: 040-2445845 Fax: 040-2444580 NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. Hong Kong Tel: 2886-9318 Fax: 2886-9022/9044 NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. NEC Electronics (France) S.A. Velizy-Villacoublay, France Tel: 01-30-67 58 00 Fax: 01-30-67 58 99 Seoul Branch Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-528-0303 Fax: 02-528-4411 NEC Electronics (Germany) GmbH Duesseldorf, Germany Tel: 0211-65 03 02 Fax: 0211-65 03 490 NEC Electronics (France) S.A. NEC Electronics (UK) Ltd. Milton Keynes, UK Tel: 01908-691-133 Fax: 01908-670-290 Madrid Office Madrid, Spain Tel: 91-504-2787 Fax: 91-504-2860 NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd. United Square, Singapore Tel: 65-253-8311 Fax: 65-250-3583 NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd. NEC Electronics Italiana s.r.l. Milano, Italy Tel: 02-66 75 41 Fax: 02-66 75 42 99 NEC Electronics (Germany) GmbH Scandinavia Office Taeby, Sweden Tel: 08-63 80 820 Fax: 08-63 80 388 Taipei, Taiwan Tel: 02-2719-2377 Fax: 02-2719-5951 NEC do Brasil S.A. Electron Devices Division Guarulhos-SP Brasil Tel: 55-11-6462-6810 Fax: 55-11-6462-6829 J00.7 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 5 [MEMO] 6 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 INTRODUCTION Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who design and develop application systems of the 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series. Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS shown in the organization below. Organization This manual consists of the following chapters: * General * Installation * Starting and exiting * Functions of ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS * Association with project manager * Window reference How to read this manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical engineering, logic circuits, microcontrollers, C language, and assemblers. For users who are using this manual as the ID78K0S-NS user's manual Unless there are differences in functionality, the ID78K0-NS is described as the representative product in this manual. Substitute ID78K0S-NS for ID78K0-NS when necessary. To understand the hardware functions of the 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series Refer to the Hardware User's Manual for each product. To understand the instruction functions of the 78K/0 Series Refer to the 78K/0 Series User's Manual Instructions. To understand the instruction functions of the 78K/0S Series Refer to the 78K/0S Series User's Manual Instructions. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 7 Conventions Data significance: Note: Caution: Remark: Numerical representation: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Information requiring paticular attention Supplementary information Binary... xxxx or xxxxB Decimal... xxxx Hexadecimal...xxxxH Prefixes indicating power of 2 (address space, memory capacity): K (kilo): 210 = 1,024 M (mega): 220 = 1,0242 Key descriptions: The key descriptions in this manual are explained in terms of the PC-9821 series keyboard. When using a keyboard whose key descriptions differ from the above, use the keys in accordance with the descriptions in APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST. 8 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 Related Documents The documents related to this manual are listed below. The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such. Documents related to development tools (user's manuals) (78K/0 Series) Document Name IE-78K0-NS (In-circuit emulator for 78K/0 Series) IE-78K0-NS-A (In-circuit emulator for 78K/0 Series) IE-78K0-NS-PA (Peripheral I/O board for 78K/0 Series) CC78K0 (C compiler) Operation Language RA78K0 (Assembler package) Operation Language Structured Assembly Language SM78K0S, SM78K0 (Ver. 2.10 or later) (System simulator) ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS (Ver. 2.20 or later) (Integrated debugger) ID78K0-NS (Integrated debugger) ID78K0 (Integrated debugger) Operation WindowsTM Based Document No. U13731E U14889E To be prepared U14297E U14298E U14445E U14446E U11789E To be prepared Operation Windows Based This manual Reference Windows Based Reference Windows Based Guide Windows Based U12900E U11539E U11649E U11537E U11536E U12257E U14610E 78K/0 Series Real-Time OS Fundamentals Installation MX78K0 (78K/0 Series OS) Project Manager Ver. 3.12 or later (Windows Based) Fundamental Documents related to development tools (user's manuals) (78K/0S Series) Document Name IE-78K0S-NS (In-circuit emulator for 78K/0S Series) IE-78K0S-NS-A (In-circuit emulator for 78K/0S Series) CC78K0S (C compiler) Operation Language RA78K0S (Assembler package) Operation Language Structured Assembly Language SM78K0S, SM78K0 (Ver. 2.10 or later) (System simulator) ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS (Ver. 2.20 or later) (Integrated debugger) ID78K0S-NS (Integrated debugger) MX78K0S (78K/0S Series OS) Project Manager Ver. 3.12 or later (Windows Based) Operation WindowsTM Based Document No. U13549E To be prepared U11816E U11817E U11622E U11599E U11623E U14611E Operation Windows Based This manual Reference Windows Based Fundamental U12901E U12938E U14610E User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 9 [MEMO] 10 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 GENERAL.......................................................................................................................... 19 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 19 Features....................................................................................................................................... 19 System Configuration ................................................................................................................ 20 Operating Environment ............................................................................................................. 21 1.4.1 Hardware environment ..................................................................................................................... 21 1.4.2 Software environment....................................................................................................................... 21 1.5 Note for Debugging at Source Level ........................................................................................ 22 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 23 CHAPTER 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 Device Driver .............................................................................................................................. 23 Device File................................................................................................................................... 23 Installation of ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS..................................................................................... 24 2.3.1 Precautions for installation................................................................................................................. 24 2.3.2 Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................ 25 2.4 Uninstalling ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS ....................................................................................... 32 STARTING AND EXITING............................................................................................... 35 CHAPTER 3 3.1 3.2 Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 35 Exiting.......................................................................................................................................... 37 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS .......................................................... 39 CHAPTER 4 4.1 Mapping Function ...................................................................................................................... 39 4.1.1 Mapping function of ID78K0-NS ....................................................................................................... 39 4.1.2 Mapping functions of ID78K0S-NS .................................................................................................... 40 4.2 Emulation Execution Functions ............................................................................................... 40 4.2.1 Real-time execution function ............................................................................................................ 40 4.2.2 Non real-time execution function ...................................................................................................... 41 4.3 Event Function ........................................................................................................................... 42 4.3.1 Using event function ......................................................................................................................... 42 4.3.2 Event conditions ............................................................................................................................... 43 4.4 4.5 Break Functions ......................................................................................................................... 45 Trace Function............................................................................................................................ 47 4.5.1 Operation of trace ............................................................................................................................. 47 4.5.2 Trace condition setting function ........................................................................................................ 48 4.5.3 Trace result display function ............................................................................................................. 49 4.6 4.7 4.8 Coverage Measurement Function ............................................................................................ 50 Snapshot Function..................................................................................................................... 50 Load/Save Functions ................................................................................................................. 51 4.8.1 Display files ...................................................................................................................................... 51 4.8.2 Information files ................................................................................................................................ 51 4.9 Register Manipulation Functions ............................................................................................. 52 4.10 Memory Manipulation Functions .............................................................................................. 52 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 11 4.11 Time Measurement Function ..................................................................................................... 52 4.12 Real-Time RAM Sampling Function .......................................................................................... 52 CHAPTER 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER................................................................ 53 Debugger Registration in PM Project ....................................................................................... 53 5.1.1 Debugger selection ...........................................................................................................................53 Starting Up ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS from PM ......................................................................... 54 5.2.1 Reproducing debug environment ......................................................................................................54 Correction and Auto Load of Source File ................................................................................ 55 WINDOW REFERENCE.................................................................................................... 57 CHAPTER 6 6.1 6.2 Window List................................................................................................................................. 57 Explanation of Windows ............................................................................................................ 59 Main Window ..............................................................................................................................................60 Configuration Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................86 Bank Set Dialog Box (ID78K0-NS only) ......................................................................................................91 Mask Option Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................95 Extended Option Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................97 Debugger Option Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................101 Font Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................................109 Project File Load Dialog Box.....................................................................................................................112 Project File Save Dialog Box.....................................................................................................................115 View File Load Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................119 View File Save Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................122 Download Dialog Box................................................................................................................................128 Upload Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................................132 Browse Dialog Box....................................................................................................................................135 Source Move Dialog Box ..........................................................................................................................137 Address Move Dialog Box.........................................................................................................................140 Trace Move Dialog Box.............................................................................................................................143 Symbol To Address Dialog Box ................................................................................................................146 Source Window.........................................................................................................................................149 Source Search Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................162 Assemble Window ....................................................................................................................................165 Assemble Search Dialog Box....................................................................................................................176 Memory Window .......................................................................................................................................179 Memory Search Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................184 Memory Fill Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................187 Memory Copy Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................189 Memory Compare Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................191 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box........................................................................................................193 Watch Window ..........................................................................................................................................195 Quick Watch Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................................200 Add Watch Dialog Box ..............................................................................................................................204 Register Window.......................................................................................................................................207 SFR Window .............................................................................................................................................211 SFR Select Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................215 12 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 Add I/O Port Dialog Box............................................................................................................................ 218 Local Variable Window ............................................................................................................................. 221 Stack Window........................................................................................................................................... 223 Trace View Window .................................................................................................................................. 227 Trace Search Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................... 236 Trace Data Select Dialog Box................................................................................................................... 244 Coverage Window (Only valid if the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used) ....................................................................................... 247 Coverage Search Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 252 Coverage-Clear Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 256 Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 258 Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box....................................................................................................... 261 Event Manager ......................................................................................................................................... 264 Software Break Manager .......................................................................................................................... 273 Event Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 276 Event Link Dialog Box............................................................................................................................... 288 Break Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 296 Trace Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 303 Snap Shot Dialog Box............................................................................................................................... 313 Timer Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 327 Timer Result Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................... 337 DMM Dialog Box....................................................................................................................................... 339 Pass Count Dialog Box............................................................................................................................. 345 Delay Count Dialog Box............................................................................................................................ 347 Reset Debugger Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 349 About Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................... 351 Exit Debugger Dialog Box......................................................................................................................... 352 Error/Warning Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 354 APPENDIX A APPENDIX B B.1 B.2 DEBUGGING WITH ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS .................................................. 355 TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................................. 359 Terminology .............................................................................................................................. 359 Window Types and Configuration .......................................................................................... 368 B.2.1 Windows......................................................................................................................................... 368 B.2.2 Dialog boxes................................................................................................................................... 368 APPENDIX C APPENDIX D D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6 ERROR MESSAGE LIST............................................................................................. 369 KEY FUNCTION LIST .................................................................................................. 391 Special Function Key Function List ....................................................................................... 391 Function Key Function List ..................................................................................................... 392 Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) .......................................................... 393 Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) ........................................................................ 393 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ........................................................... 394 Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key)......................................................................... 394 13 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 D.7 D.8 Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ........................................................................... 394 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key) ........................................... 395 INDEX ............................................................................................................................. 397 APPENDIX E 14 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 LIST OF FIGURES (1/3) Figure No. 1-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 5-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 Title Page ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS System Configuration Example......................................................................... 20 ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) Icon........................................................................................................................ 35 Configuration Dialog Box on Starting ............................................................................................................... 35 Main Window.................................................................................................................................................... 36 comctl32.dll 4.72 Installer ................................................................................................................................. 36 Exit Debugger Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................ 37 Select Debugger Type Dialog Box (PM)........................................................................................................... 53 Main Window.................................................................................................................................................... 60 Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................. 61 Example of Tool Hint ........................................................................................................................................ 63 Status Bar......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Example of Menu Explanation Display ............................................................................................................. 66 File Menu Bar ................................................................................................................................................... 67 Edit Menu Bar................................................................................................................................................... 68 View Menu Bar ................................................................................................................................................. 70 Option Menu Bar .............................................................................................................................................. 76 Run Menu Bar .................................................................................................................................................. 78 Event Menu Bar................................................................................................................................................ 80 Browse Menu Bar............................................................................................................................................. 82 Jump Menu Bar ................................................................................................................................................ 83 Window Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................................ 84 Help Menu Bar ................................................................................................................................................. 85 Configuration Dialog Box.................................................................................................................................. 86 Bank Set Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................................ 91 Mask Option Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................... 95 Extended Option Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 97 Debugger Option Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................... 101 Font Dialog Box.............................................................................................................................................. 109 Project File Load Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 112 Project File Save Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................... 116 View File Load Dialog Box.............................................................................................................................. 119 View File Save Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 122 Download Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................................... 129 Upload Dialog Box.......................................................................................................................................... 132 Browse Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................................... 135 Source Move Dialog Box ................................................................................................................................ 137 Address Move Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................. 140 Trace Move Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................. 143 Symbol To Address Dialog Box...................................................................................................................... 146 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 15 LIST OF FIGURES (2/3) Figure No. 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-67 6-68 6-69 6-70 6-71 6-72 6-73 6-74 Title Page Source Window ..............................................................................................................................................149 Source Search Dialog Box..............................................................................................................................162 Assemble Window ..........................................................................................................................................165 Assemble Search Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................176 Memory Window .............................................................................................................................................180 Memory Search Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................184 Memory Fill Dialog Box...................................................................................................................................187 Memory Copy Dialog Box ...............................................................................................................................189 Memory Compare Dialog Box.........................................................................................................................191 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box..............................................................................................................193 Watch Window................................................................................................................................................196 Quick Watch Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................200 Add Watch Dialog Box....................................................................................................................................204 Register Window.............................................................................................................................................207 SFR Window...................................................................................................................................................211 SFR Select Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................215 Add I/O Port Dialog Box..................................................................................................................................218 Local Variable Window ...................................................................................................................................221 Stack Window .................................................................................................................................................223 Trace View Window ........................................................................................................................................227 Trace Search Dialog Box................................................................................................................................236 Trace Data Select Dialog Box.........................................................................................................................244 Coverage Window ..........................................................................................................................................247 Coverage Search Dialog Box .........................................................................................................................252 Coverage-Clear Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................256 Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box .........................................................................................................258 Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box.............................................................................................................261 Event Manager ...............................................................................................................................................265 Software Break Manager ................................................................................................................................273 Event Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................277 Event Link Dialog Box.....................................................................................................................................289 Break Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................297 Trace Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................304 Snap Shot Dialog Box.....................................................................................................................................314 Timer Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................328 Timer Result Dialog Box .................................................................................................................................337 DMM Dialog Box.............................................................................................................................................339 Pass Count Dialog Box...................................................................................................................................345 Delay Count Dialog Box..................................................................................................................................347 Reset Debugger Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................................349 About Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................................351 Exit Debugger Dialog Box...............................................................................................................................352 16 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 LIST OF FIGURES (3/3) Figure No. 6-75 C-1 Title Page Error/Warning Dialog Box............................................................................................................................... 354 Display Format of Error Message................................................................................................................... 369 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 17 LIST OF TABLES Table No. 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 B-1 B-2 C-1 C-2 D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 Title Page Relationship Between Event Conditions and Setting Dialog Box......................................................................42 Each Condition That Can Be Set in Event Dialog Box......................................................................................43 Event Condition Types......................................................................................................................................44 Trace Data Display Contents ............................................................................................................................49 Display Files Handled by ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS...................................................................................51 Information Files Handled by ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS.............................................................................51 Windows of ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS Debuggers .....................................................................................57 IE Status Display Contents ...............................................................................................................................65 CPU Status Display Contents ...........................................................................................................................65 Display Contents of Break Cause .....................................................................................................................65 STEP Modes ....................................................................................................................................................65 Key Input Modes...............................................................................................................................................66 Delimiter Symbols...........................................................................................................................................360 Register Set of 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series.......................................................................................................362 Error Message Type .......................................................................................................................................369 Error Message List .........................................................................................................................................370 Special Function Key Function List.................................................................................................................391 Function Key Function List .............................................................................................................................392 Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) ....................................................................................393 Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) .................................................................................................393 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) .....................................................................................394 Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ..................................................................................................394 Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) ....................................................................................................394 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key)......................................................................395 18 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1.1 Overview The 78K/0 Series integrated debugger ID78K0-NS (hereafter referred to as "ID78K0-NS") and the 78K/0S Series integrated debugger ID78K0S-NS (hereafter referred to as "ID78K0S-NS") are software tools, developed for NEC's 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series of 8-bit microcontrollers for embedded control applications, to debug the user programs efficiently. The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS feature an easy-to-understand GUI (graphical user interface) on a host machine using Windows as the operating system. Moreover, the commands that are frequently used can be input using the mouse, providing an environment with excellent operability. 1.2 Features The features of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS are as follows. (1) GUI function The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS run in a Windows environment and their debugging operations can be controlled with a mouse. Buttons and menus are displayed in each window, and other related information can be selected from the displayed information. (2) Debugging at source level Referencing/setting variables and structures, displaying programs, and setting breakpoints can be efficiently performed at source text level by manipulating function names and line numbers. (3) Debugging at instruction level Referencing/setting symbols and register values, displaying programs, and setting breakpoints can be efficiently performed at instruction level by manipulating labels and addresses. (4) Use of in-circuit emulator Breakpoints can be set and user programs can be traced by using the detailed event setting functions of an incircuit emulator. (5) Monitor function (automatic display updating function while execution is stopped) When execution of the user program is stopped, the values displayed in the window are automatically updated. (6) Saving/restoring debugging environment The debugging environment can be saved in a file. The saved environment can be restored, and debugging can be resumed from where the debugging environment was saved. (7) Function expansion by TIP (Tool Interface Protocol) By linking up with a task debugger (RD), system performance analyzer (AZ), etc., it is possible to vastly improve the debugging efficiency of applications that use a real-time OS (RX). User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 19 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1.3 System Configuration The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS offer a comfortable debugging environment for user programs and target boards developed for the 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series by connecting the host machine and the in-circuit emulator via a dedicated parallel interface board. Figure 1-1 shows an example of the system configuration of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS. Figure 1-1. ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS System Configuration Example Host machine ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS Device File Interface board Device driver In-circuit emulator Target system 20 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1.4 Operating Environment To use the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS, the following hardware and software environments are necessary. 1.4.1 Hardware environment (1) Host machine * PC-9821 series * PC98-NX series * IBM PC/ATTM or compatibles CPU: PentiumTM 100 MHz or more (120 MHz or more is recommended) Memory: RAM: 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) (2) In-circuit emulator * For ID78K0-NS * IE-78K0-NS * IE-78K0-NS-A (3) In-circuit emulator optional board * For ID78K0-NS <1> Emulation board * IE-780xxx-NS-EM1 * IE-780xxx-NS-EM4 * IE-78K0-NS-P0x <2> Performance board (78K/0 Series only) * IE-78K0-NS-PA Caution These optional boards are used in combination with the in-circuit emulator. * For ID78K0S-NS * IE-789xxx-NS-EM1 * For ID78K0S-NS * IE-78K0S-NS * IE-78K0S-NS-A (4) Interface board * IE-70000-98-IF-C (PC-9821 series) * IE-70000-PC-IF-C (IBM PC/AT or compatibles) * IE-70000-CD-IF-A * IE-70000-PCI-IF(-A) 1.4.2 Software environment (1) OS Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NTTM4.0 (Service Pack 3) (2) Device file Device file of target file to be used (3) Device driver Device driver for interface board (included with this product) User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 21 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1.5 Note for Debugging at Source Level When debugging at the source level, add an option (-g option) that creates debugging information after the source files have been compiled. If this is not done, debugging cannot be performed at the source level. 22 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Prior to using the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS), it is necessary to install the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS), a device file, and a device driver. This chapter explains how to install/uninstall the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS). 2.1 Device Driver Install the device driver according to the "README_E.TXT or CD-ROM directory "Driver". Note When using Windows 98 or Windows 2000, follow the same procedure as when using Windows 95. Note " in the 3.5-inch floppy disk "NEC IE-PC Driver V1.0" 2.2 Device File To install the device file, use the "Device file installer" included with this product. Use of this dedicated installer enables installation of the device file in the Win32 environment. Since the installer "SETUP.EXE" in the device file product disk is for the Win16 environment, it registers the device file information "NECDEV.INI". However, because this product supports the Win32 environment, the device file information must be registered in the registry. It is therefore essential to use the "Device file installer". An outline of the installation procedure is described below. <1> Start up the "Device file installer". When newly installing the device file, click the Install button on the display following startup and specify the installation information file "NECSETUP.INI" from the device file product disk. <2> If the device file is registered in "NECDEV.INI" and needs to be moved to the Win32 environment, specify "NECDEV.INI" from the DFINST "source selection". Following the specification, select the type displayed in the "Source" list and click the Move button. (Note that the FPGA data file (G0XXX.78K) will not be moved automatically and therefore should be copied manually.) <3> To uninstall the device file, select the type displayed in the DFINST "registry" list, select "Delete files", and click the Uninstall button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 23 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2.3 Installation of ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS 2.3.1 Precautions for installation <1> Prior to installation, create a backup of the system disks. The computer may need to be restarted after installation, so exit all other applications currently being used. <2> Do not install the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) in a directory in which a version of the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0SNS) earlier than V2.01 is installed. Since products of an earlier version than V2.01 support Win16, addition of an ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) supporting Win32 in the same directory may cause the device to malfunction. <3> If reinstalling the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS), be sure to uninstall it first. If the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) has not been uninstalled and is reinstalled in a directory that is different to the one the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0SNS) was originally installed in, uninstallation of the originally installed ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) may become impossible. <4> Do not install the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) in a directory with blank spaces. Related tools, such as the Project Manager, that are to be installed in the same directory as the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) may not operate correctly, depending on their version. <5> The file below created following installation is the file used for uninstallation, and therefore should not be deleted (it is assumed that the installation destination is C:\nectools32). C:\nectools32\SETUP\*.* <6> "comctl32.dll4.72 installation" (40comupd.exe) is registered in the program folder in which the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is installed. This file is used to update the comctl32.dll file used in the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0SNS). If an application error occurs while in use or problems such as a dialog box not displaying data correctly are experienced, install comctl32.dll using "comctl32.dll4.72 installation". If Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed, installation of comctl32.dll is unnecessary. 24 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2.3.2 Installation procedure The following describes the method of installing the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS). Here, the installation procedure is explained with "C:\Windows" as the directory in which Windows is installed and "E" as the floppy disk drive. <1> Turn on power to the host machine (PC-9821 or IBM PC/AT) and start up Windows. <2> . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 25 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <4> When installing the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS), click the software license agreement. Clicking display the previous screen. after reading and accepting the terms of will abort installation. Click to <5> Select the items to be installed and the destination drive or directory. Clear the check mark from the components that are not to be installed. The default destination drive or directory is C:\nectools32. Bearing in mind relationships with other NEC tools, installation using the default directory is recommended. If there is a problem with the drive or directory, click After setting each item, click To abort installation, click . . Click to display the previous screen. and make appropriate modifications. 26 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <6> If newly installing an ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) or if previously installed ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) has already been uninstalled, follow the procedure from <7>. (1) If there is an ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) preinstalled in the directory specified by <5>, the following message is displayed. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 27 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Click Click If and the following dialog box appears. to uninstall the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS). is selected, uninstallation will not be executed and the procedure shifts to <7>. (2) If the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is installed in a directory other than a directory specified by <5>, the following message is displayed. Note that the execution shifts to <7> by clicking activated. , in which case the uninstaller will not be 28 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <7> Specify the name of the folder in which the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) icon is to be registered. The default folder name is "NEC Tools32". After specifying the folder name, click click . Click to display the previous screen. . To abort installation, <8> Final confirmation of installation start is made. Check the settings made in <4> to <7>. If there are no changes to these settings, click If there are any problems, click . If changes are necessary, click and abort installation. . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 29 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <9> Start copying files. The Change-of-system-disk message will appear during copying. The installation status is displayed. <10> If an NEC development tool environment for Win16 (default directory: \nectools) does not exist in the host machine used, move to procedure <11>. If a development tool for Win16 exists in the host machine, the following dialog box appears. Click to move the device file used in the development tool environment for Win16 to the development tool environment for Win32 (this product). If is selected, execute the device file installer "DFINST.EXE" following the installation of the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) to shift the device file. The ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) will not operate normally unless the device file is moved. 30 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <11> After the files have been copied, the Setup Complete dialog box will open, so click Installation of the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is now complete. . <12> The ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) icon will be registered in the folder specified in procedure <7>. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 31 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2.4 Uninstalling ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS This section explains how to uninstall the ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS, using "C:\WINDOWS" as the directory in which Windows is installed. <1> Turn on power to the host machine (PC-9821 or IBM PC/AT) and start up Windows. <2> Activate "Add/Remove Programs" from the control panel. <3> Select "NEC ID78K0-NS 78K/0 Integrated Debugger V2.xx" ("NEC ID78K0S-NS 78K/0S Integrated Debugger V2.xx" for the ID78K0S-NS) from the list displayed in "Install/Uninstall" and click . 32 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <4> The Confirm File Deletion dialog box will be displayed next, so click . File deletion starts. <5> The dialog box below will appear during deletion, so click ID78K0S-NS is reinstalled). (if is selected and the files are not deleted here, the latest "TIPAD78K0A.DLL" will be overwritten when the ID78K0-NS or User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 33 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION <6> The program will be deleted. When the message "Uninstall completed" appears, click . Uninstallation of ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is now complete. 34 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING This chapter explains how to start and exit the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS. 3.1 Starting The start method is as follows: <1> Turn on power to the in-circuit emulator and target system. <2> Start Windows on the PC. <3> Double-click the shortcut icon of the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) on the desktop to start up the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) (See Figure 3-1). The Configuration dialog box will be displayed (See Figure 3-2). Figure 3-1. ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) Icon Figure 3-2. Configuration Dialog Box on Starting User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 35 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING <4> Operating environment parameters for the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) are set in this dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). After setting the parameters, click the dialog box. <5> The main window will then be opened (See Figure 3-3) and the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) can be operated. Debugging operations are all carried out from this window. Figure 3-3. Main Window button in the (1) Toolbar (2) Window display area (3) Status display area Caution Problems such as dialog boxes not displaying data correctly are sometimes experienced when the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is started up, or if an application error occurs while in use. One cause of such problems may be that an old version of comctl32.dll, which comes with Windows 95, is being used. product. Note that if Windows 98 or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.X or 4.X has been installed, this update is unnecessary. Figure 3-4. comctl32.dll 4.72 Installer If this is the case, it will be necessary to update comctl32.dll using the comctl32.dll 4.72 Installer (40comupd.exe) included with this 36 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING 3.2 Exiting The exit method is as follows: <1> In the main window, select [File] [Exit]. The following Exit Debugger dialog box will be displayed. Figure 3-5. Exit Debugger Dialog Box <2> To save the current debugging environment in the project file, check the check box "... Save Project file". <3> Click the button. If the check box is checked in <2>, the Save As dialog box is opened, the current debugging environment is saved in the project file, all the windows are closed, and then the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is exited. If the check box is not checked, all the windows are closed and then the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is exited. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 37 [MEMO] 38 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS This chapter explains the basic functions and processing conventions of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS. 4.1 Mapping Function 4.1.1 Mapping function of ID78K0-NS The following seven types of mapping functions are available. These mapping functions are set in the Configuration dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). (1) Internal ROM The memory area specified as internal ROM is equivalent to the internal ROM of the target device. If the target device writes data to the memory area, a write protect break occurs. (2) Internal RAM The memory area specified as internal RAM is equivalent to the internal RAM of the target device. In this case, the target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator. (3) User area mapping (Target) Note The memory area specified for user area mapping is an area that accesses the memory on the target system. In this case, the target device accesses the memory on the target system. Note These memory areas can be set in address areas other than the internal ROM and internal RAM areas. (4) Emulation ROM Note The memory area specified as emulation ROM is equivalent to the ROM connected to the target device. Note These memory areas can be set in address areas other than the internal ROM and internal RAM areas. (5) Emulation RAM Note The memory area specified as emulation RAM is equivalent to the RAM connected to the target device. In this case, the target device accesses the memory in the in-circuit emulator. Note These memory areas can be set in address areas other than the internal ROM and internal RAM areas. (6) I/O protect area (I/O Protect) The I/O protect area can be set in the area specified as Target. This area is displayed in the same manner as an unmapped area on the Memory window (the symbol ?? is displayed). If this area is mapped with this attribute, it can no longer be read or written easily, protecting it from erroneous access from the Memory window. To read or write a value of the area mapped with this attribute, register in the SFR window or Watch window (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). (7) Stack area The area used as a stack area can be set as the stack area. Setting the stack area enables deletion of a "stack overflow error" when data has overflowed from the stack area during program execution. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 39 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.1.2 Mapping functions of ID78K0S-NS For the ID78K0S-NS, the following type of mapping function is available. This mapping function is set in the Configuration dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). (1) Stack area The area used as a stack can be set as the stack area. Setting the stack area enables detection of a "stack overflow error" when data has overflowed from the stack area during program execution. 4.2 Emulation Execution Functions The emulation execution functions start the execution of the user program and the operation of the tracer and timer by the emulation CPU. These functions are classified as follows by the execution mode of the user program. 4.2.1 Real-time execution function Real-time execution can be performed by the following commands. * Go command ( button) * Start command (no button) * Go & Go command (no button) * Come command (no button) * Restart command (no button) * Return Out command ( button) button) (1) Go command ( This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC register. Execution of the user program is stopped when a specified break event condition is satisfied. Each analyzer gets ready to operate when the user program is executed, and is executed or stopped depending on whether each event condition (trace event condition, timer event condition, etc.) is satisfied or not. (2) Start command This command executes the user program starting from a specified address. Execution of the user program is stopped when a specified break event condition is satisfied. (3) Go & Go command This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC register. Execution of the user program is stopped once if a specified break event condition is satisfied. The contents of each window are updated, and the user program is then executed again starting from the address where it stopped. These operations are repeated until the user issues a Stop command. (4) Come command This command executes the user program starting from the address indicated by the current PC register to the address selected in the line/address display area on the Source window or Assemble window (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE), and then a break occurs. While the user program is being executed by this command, the break event currently set does not occur. 40 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS (5) Restart command This command resets the emulation CPU and then executes the user program starting from address 0. This operation is the same as when the Go command is executed following reset of the emulation CPU prior to user program execution. button) (6) Return Out command ( This command executes until execution returns to the calling function. This command may not operate properly with assembler functions, etc. 4.2.2 Non real-time execution function Non real-time execution can be performed by using the following commands. * Step In command ( * Return Out command ( * Next Over command ( button) button) button) * Slowmotion command (no button) button) (1) Step In command ( The operation performed by this command differs as follows depending on the debugging mode. (a) "Source level" mode One line of the source text is executed starting from the current PC register value, and the contents of each window are updated. (b) "Instruction level" mode One instruction is executed starting from the current PC register value, and the contents of each window are updated. button) (2) Next Over command ( The operation of this command differs depending on the debugging mode. (a) Source level Next step execution is performed for one line of the source text from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated. (b) Instruction level Next step execution is performed for one instruction from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated. (3) Slowmotion command This command executes one line in the "source level" mode, or one instruction in the "instruction level" mode, starting from the address indicated by the current PC register. The contents of each window are updated each time this command is executed. These operations are repeated until the user issues a Stop command. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 41 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.3 Event Function An event is a "specific status of the target system" during the execution of the user program, for example "address 0x1000 fetched" and "data written to address 0x1000" showing the specific status of the target system during debugging. The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS use these events as action triggers for break, trace, timer measurement, snapshot, and DMM functions. An event function sets, deletes, or references the "specific status of the target system" that triggers an action (debug action) as an "event condition". 4.3.1 Using event function To use an action that is triggered by an event in accordance with the user's debugging aims, the event conditions shown in Table 4-1 must be set. Table 4-1. Relationship Between Event Conditions and Setting Dialog Box Event Condition Break event condition Setting Dialog Box Break dialog box Function Condition to execute user program or stop operation of tracer and timer Start/end condition when execution process of user program is saved in trace memory Start/end condition when execution time of user program is measured Trigger condition for executing snapshot Condition to write arbitrary data to specified address when a specified event is established during execution of user program Trace event condition Trace dialog box Timer event condition Timer dialog box Snap event condition DMM event condition Snap Shot dialog box DMM dialog box These event conditions are set by using an "event condition" or "event link condition" alone or in combination. To use the event function of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS, therefore, the necessary "event condition" and "event link condition" are first created, and then the event conditions shown in Table 4-1 are set by using these conditions. 42 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.3.2 Event conditions How to create each event condition is explained next. (1) Creating event conditions An "event condition" is set in the Event dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). An address condition, status condition, data condition, external sense data condition, and access size condition are set in this dialog box. A name is given to the combination of these conditions for registration. The maximum number of event conditions that can be registered in the Event dialog box is 256. The maximum number of event conditions that can be simultaneously used for each event condition is 28 (16 execution events and 12 access events) for the IE-78K0-NS + IE-78K0S-NS-PA, IE-78K0-NS-A, and IE-78K0S-NS and 12 (8 execution events and 4 access events) for IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0S-NS. Table 4-2 lists the contents of each condition that can be set in the Event dialog box. Table 4-2. Each Condition That Can Be Set in Event Dialog Box Condition Address condition Contents Uses a specified address or address range as an event. A mask value cannot be set for the specified address. Uses a status for an address condition as an event. The status is selected from the following. Note Execution : Execution of instruction Before Execution: Read: Write: R/W: External Trigger1: External Trigger2: Execution of instruction (Break before execution) Reading memory Writing memory Reading/writing memory External trigger (1 bit) External trigger (ID78K0-NS: 8 bits) (ID-78K0S-NS: 16 bits) Data condition Uses the data detected by a status condition as an event. A mask value can be set for the data. Uses the data of the external probe signal as an event. A mask value can be set for an external sense data condition. Status condition External sense data condition Note If Execution is selected as the status condition, the address mask, data, data mask, and access size conditions are invalid. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 43 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS (2) Event condition type Event conditions are classified into the three event types shown in the table below. These event types are automatically determined by selecting the desired status condition when creating an event condition. Table 4-3 lists the event condition types. Table 4-3. Event Condition Types Event Type Execution event Status Execution Before Execution External Trigger1 External Trigger2 Function Event condition is satisfied when user program begins execution of instruction at specified address and when data is input to external sense clip at that time. Up to 18 event conditions of this type can be used for each event condition. When the user program accesses specified memory, up to 12 event conditions of this type can be used for each event condition. Access event Program Read Program Write Program R/W (3) Creating event link condition An "event link condition" is a condition under which a sequential rule is applied to the respective events to treat the events as a single event. An event link condition is created in the Event Link dialog box (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). By arranging the event conditions first registered in the Event dialog box in random order in the Event Link dialog box, these event conditions can be registered under one name as single event link condition. The registered event link condition can be used to set various event conditions in the same manner as event conditions. The maximum number of event link conditions that can be set in the Event Link dialog box is 256. However, the number of event link conditions that can be simultaneously used for each event condition is 3. (4) Displaying setting status of event condition All the registered event conditions and event link conditions are managed or displayed in the Event Manager (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). The setting status of all the event conditions created by using the event conditions or event link condition are also managed or displayed in the Event Manager. In the Event Manager (Refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE), a mark indicating the type of each event condition, and an icon indicating an event name specified for registration are displayed. (5) Setting each event condition The event conditions shown in Table 4-1 are created in each setting dialog box. Each event condition is created by dragging the event condition registered in the Event Manager, or the icon of an event link condition, to the condition item in each setting dialog box. A created event condition is "set" by clicking the function button Set or OK in the setting dialog box, or by clicking the mark of the event icon in the Event Manager and display it in red. By setting a created event condition, a debug action occurs as an event condition. For all the event conditions it is possible to "register" up to 256 conditions, but the number of conditions that can be "set" differs depending on each event condition. 44 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.4 Break Functions The break functions stop the execution of the user program and the operation of the tracer and timer by the emulation CPU. The following six types of break functions are available. * * * * * * Event detection break Break by Come function Software break Break on satisfaction of condition during step execution Forced break Fail-safe break When the Come, Step In, Return Out, or Next Over command of the emulation execution functions is executed, event detection break and detection of software break are not performed. Each break function is explained below. (1) Event detection break An event detection break is a function to stop the execution of the user program by detecting a set break event condition. This function is used to stop a user program executed by the Go, Go & Go, and Restart commands. When the Go & Go command has been executed, the contents of each window are updated and the user program is then executed again after an event detection break has been implemented. Set break events as follows: * Set a break event in the Source window or Assemble window as an execution event. * Set a break event in the Break dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). (2) Break by Come function The break by Come function is a function to stop a user program executed by the Come command by detecting an address specified in the Source window or Assemble window. After user program execution has been stopped, the breakpoint by Come function is eliminated. While the user program is being executed using this function, the currently set break event does not occur. (3) Software break A software break is a function to stop a user program executed by the Go, Go & Go, or Restart command, by detecting a specified address. While event detection breaks use one hardware resource for one event condition, a software break can set a breakpoint to two or more addresses. (4) Break on satisfaction of condition during step execution This is a function to stop the execution of the user program when the end condition of each command (Step In, Next Over, Return Out, or Slowmotion) is satisfied. Because one instruction at a time is executed, stopped, and condition checked, the processing time of this function is slower than that of real-time execution. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 45 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS (5) Forced break A forced break is a function to forcibly stop the execution of the user program. This function is valid for all the program execution commands. A forced break is implemented by the following command. * Stop command Forcibly stops the execution of the user program. (6) Fail-safe break A fail-safe break is a function to forcibly stop the user program when there has been an execution prohibiting the user program from accessing the memory and registers. The following three types of fail-safe break functions are available. (a) Non-map break This break occurs if an attempt is made to access non-mapping area. (b) Write-protect break This break occurs if an attempt is made to write to memory that must not be written to, such as ROM. (c) SFR illegal access break This break occurs if an attempt is made to access an SFR illegally. If a fail-safe break occurs, the chances are the user program has a problem or the set environment of the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS is wrong. Caution A non-map break may occur if the user program is written in the vicinity of the boundary between the mapping area and non-mapping area. This non-map break occurs in the following case. [Maximum address value of mapping area - 5] [Program address] [Maximum address value of mapping area] 46 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.5 Trace Function The trace function is to save the history of the data indicating the execution process of the user program in the trace memory. The trace data saved in the trace memory can be displayed on the Trace View window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). The functions related to the trace operation and trace are explained below. 4.5.1 Operation of trace The trace memory of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS is a ring buffer with a capacity of 8,192 frames. If a trace exceeding 8,192 frames is executed, therefore, the newest trace data is overwritten to the oldest frame. The operation of the tracer differs as follows depending on the execution mode of the user program. (1) Operation during real-time execution The operation of the tracer differs depending on the specified trace mode. Trace Mode All trace Operation of Tracer Starts trace when real-time execution of program is specified, and ends trace when break occurs Starts/ends trace when condition set on Trace dialog box is satisfied (if break occurs before that, however, trace is immediately stopped) Conditional trace (2) Operation during Step In execution The tracer operates each time one step is executed, and the trace data of one step is consecutively added to the trace memory. (3) Operation during Next Over execution The operation of the tracer is the same as in Step In execution. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 47 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.5.2 Trace condition setting function The setting function of a trace condition is as follows. (1) Setting of trace mode The following two trace modes can be set. Trace Mode All trace Conditional trace Trace Contents Unconditionally traces all execution processes of user program (default) Traces only specified zone These trace modes are set by selecting [Run] from the main window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE) followed by [Uncond. Trace ON]/[Cond. Trace ON]. To stop the tracer function, select [Run] from the main window, followed by [Tracer Stop] (this is valid only when [Ignore Break Point] under [Run] in the main window has been checked). (2) Setting trace event condition A trace event condition is a condition under which trace execution is started/ended if the conditional trace is selected as the trace mode. The trace event condition can be set on the Trace dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). Up to 256 trace event conditions can be registered, of which only one can be set. The following two modes can be selected for the conditional trace. (a) Section trace In this mode, trace is started when a specified trace start condition is satisfied, and ends when a specified trace end condition is satisfied. As a start/end condition, an event condition or event link condition is used. Qualify trace In this mode, trace is executed only when a specified address is executed or accessed. An event condition is used as the event trigger. (b) 48 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.5.3 Trace result display function The result of a trace can be checked in the Trace View window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). The Trace View window displays each frame of the trace contents of the following items shown in Table 4-4. Table 4-4. Trace Data Display Contents Displayed Item Frame Time Address Data Status Address Data Status Ext Probe DisAsm Contents Frame number of trace memory indicating time sequence Execution time of each frame Fetch address Fetch data Fetch status Access address Access data Access status Input data of external sense clip Disassemble result Displayed Item and Contents can be selected by opening the Trace Data Select dialog box under [View] [Select...] in the main window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 49 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.6 Coverage Measurement Function The coverage measurement function is for registering a status for each address when the user program is executed. The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS have a coverage memory of 64 KB and can measure any 64 KB space. Coverage measurement can be performed by selecting [Option] [Coverage ON] in the main window, and the measurements are recorded in the coverage memory when a program is executed. The result of coverage can be checked in the Coverage window. The coverage efficiency can be displayed in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box. 4.7 Snapshot Function The snapshot function is used to preserve the contents of register memory in the course of user program execution and the contents of the SFRs in the trace memory as snap data. A trigger that executes this snapshot is specified by a snap event condition. The snap event condition is set in the Snap Shot dialog box. When the snap event condition set in this dialog box is satisfied, the following data can be collected as snap data. * Register values (program registers and system registers) * SFR values * Memory contents One snap event condition can be specified to collect snap data up to 16 times. 50 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.8 Load/Save Functions The load/save functions are for loading load modules and symbol information, and loading/saving data and debugging environments. The ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) individually loads/saves each file. loaded/saved. * Display files: * Information files: Files recording the screen information when they are saved. By loading these files, the reference file is opened in the Source window. Files recording various set data and debugging environments as the internal information of the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS. The following two types of files are 4.8.1 Display files Table 4-5 lists the display files handled by the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS. Table 4-5. Display Files Handled by ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS File Name (Extension) Variable display file (.WCH) Assemble display file (.DIS) Memory display file (.MEM) Register display file (.REG) Stack trace display file (.STK) SFR display file (.SFR) Local variable display file (.LOC) Trace display file (.TVW) Coverage display file (.COV) Source display file (.SVW) Outline Shows variable information in Watch window Shows assemble information in Assemble window Shows memory information in Memory window Shows register information in Register window Shows stack trace information in Stack window Shows SFR information in SFR window Shows local variable information in Local Variable window Shows trace information in Trace View window Shows coverage information in Coverage window Shows text information in Source window Operation Window View File Load dialog box, View File Save dialog box 4.8.2 Information files Table 4-6 lists the information files handled by the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS. Table 4-6. Information Files Handled by ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS File Name (Extension) Object file (.HEX) Load module file (.LNK, .LMF, .D2B) Project file (.PRJ) Binary file (.BIN) Event set file (.EVN) Coverage result file (.CVB) Outline Stores object code of user program Stores object code of user program, symbol, and source information Stores debugging environment Stores data of binary format Stores event set information of Event Manager Stores coverage result Operation Window Download dialog box Upload dialog box Download dialog box Project File Load dialog box Project File Save dialog box Download dialog box Upload dialog box View File Load dialog box View File Save dialog box Download dialog box Upload dialog box The project file sets window/dialog box display information, size, and display area when it is loaded to restore the previous debugging environment (the status when the project file was saved). User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 51 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS OF ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS 4.9 Register Manipulation Functions The register manipulation functions are for displaying or changing the contents of the 78K/0 Series and 78K/0S Series microprocessors' program registers (PC and rp0 through rp3), system registers (SP and PSW), and SFRs. These functions can be used in the Register window or SFR window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). 4.10 Memory Manipulation Functions The memory manipulation functions are for displaying or changing the contents of the memory by using mnemonic, hexadecimal, and ASCII codes. These functions can be used in the Memory window or Assemble window (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). 4.11 Time Measurement Function The time measurement function is for measuring the total execution time from the start of execution of the user program to the end, and the execution time in a certain zone of the user program by using timer event. This function can be used in the Timer dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). Caution The number of usable timers is 1. 4.12 Real-Time RAM Sampling Function The real-time RAM sampling function reads the memory contents in real time and updates the displayed contents when a variable allocated to any 1 KB in internal RAM area, whose contents can be read even during execution of the user program, is displayed (Variable window) or the memory contents are displayed (Memory window). The sampling time for real-time RAM sampling can be set in units of 1 ms in the Extended Option dialog box (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE). 52 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 5 ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER This chapter explains the procedure and notes on using the functions associated with the Project Manager (PM hereafter). The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS can automatically perform a sequence of tasks such as creating a program, compiling, debugging, and correcting the program, in association with the PM. To debug a load module file created in the PM at the source level, confirm that the item [Option] [Debug] is checked for building. Caution When a load module file is created by using an MS-DOS TM prompt, the functions of the ID78K0- NS (ID78K0S-NS) associated with the PM cannot be used. 5.1 Debugger Registration in PM Project Either of the debuggers for ID78K0-NS/SM78K0 (ID78K0S-NS/SM78K0S) can be specified for each project in the PM. The selection procedure is explained below. 5.1.1 Debugger selection The procedure for selecting the debugger is as follows. <1> Select [Project] [New] in the PM to create a new project for the PM. Alternatively, read an existing PM project by selecting [Project] [Open...]. For details of the setting items, refer to the PM online help or user's manual. <2> Select [Option] [Select Debugger...] from the PM menu bar. This opens the Select Debugger Type dialog box. Figure 5-1 shows the Select Debugger Type dialog box. Figure 5-1. Select Debugger Type Dialog Box (PM) User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 53 CHAPTER 5 ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER <3> Either click "78K/0 System Debugger" ("78K/0S System Debugger" for the ID78K0S-NS) by mouse from the debugger list, or specify the execution file name IDK032A.EXE (with path) (IDK0S32A.EXE (with path) for the ID78K0S-NS) for the debugger file name. <4> Click OK. ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) will now be registered as the project debugger of the open PM. The ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) icon will also be displayed on the PM toolbar. 5.2 Starting Up ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS from PM One of the following three methods can be used to start up the ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS from the PM. (1) Click the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) startup button on the PM toolbar. (2) Select [Build] [Debug] from the PM menu bar. (3) Select [Build] [Build and Debug] from the PM menu bar. Alternatively, click the batch-processing button on the PM toolbar (however, the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) will start up only if Build has finished normally). 5.2.1 Reproducing debug environment By following the procedure shown below, it is possible to reproduce the debug environment of the previous time the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) was started up from the PM. <1> Create a new project file Note with the PM (eg: aaa.prj) Note Use the project file to save and reference the environment data for the debugger (ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS) and the PM. The project file extension when dealing with the debugger and PM is prj. Refer to the online help or user's manual of each product regarding the data that is saved and reproduced using a project file. <2> Start up the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) from the PM. Because the project file is new, set items other than the device classification in the Configuration dialog box, in the same way as when starting up the ID78K0NS (ID78K0S-NS) individually. <3> Debug the target device with the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS). <4> When the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) has finished debugging, check [Save project file] in the Exit Debugger dialog box and exit the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS). The debug environment at the completion of ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) debugging is saved to the aaa.prj file (the debug environment can also be saved to the aaa.prj file at times other than the completion of ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) debugging). <5> When the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is next started up after the aaa.prj file is read by the PM, the debug environment saved in <4> above is automatically reproduced. The project file currently being used by the PM (aaa.prj) is automatically read when the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is started up. 54 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 5 ASSOCIATION WITH PROJECT MANAGER 5.3 Correction and Auto Load of Source File If a bug is found as a result of debugging using the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS), source file editing, compiling, and re-downloading can be automatically executed using the following procedure while the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) remains activated. Caution If [Option] [Project Manager Options...] is selected in the PM, and if an editor other than the standard editor is selected, this processing cannot be performed. <1> Read the source file to be corrected with the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) in the Source window. With the Source window displayed at the foremost position, select [File] [Open...] on the main window to specify the corresponding file (if the corresponding file has already been displayed in the Source window, activate the window). The corresponding file is displayed in the Source window. <2> Select [Edit] [Edit Source] in the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) main window. The corresponding source file is automatically read to the standard editor and opened. <3> Correct the source file in the editor. <4> Select [File] [Save] in the editor and save the file. <5> Select [File] [Exit idea-L] in the editor to terminate the editor. As a result, the PM automatically executes compiling, assembling, and linking in accordance with the settings of the project. When these operations have been completed normally, the created load module file is automatically downloaded to the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS). Cautions 1. When the load module file is automatically downloaded, CPU reset is not executed. 2. The debug window, which was opened when the editor was called, and all event settings are restored. However, if the previously used lines and symbols have been deleted because of source file correction, an error message is displayed, and an event using the deleted symbol cannot be used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 55 [MEMO] 56 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This chapter explains in detail the functions of the windows and dialog boxes of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS. For the configuration and details of the types of the windows and dialog boxes, refer to APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY. 6.1 Window List Table 6-1 lists the windows of the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS debuggers. Table 6-1. Windows of ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS Debuggers (1/2) Window Name Main window Outline This window is displayed first when the debugger is started. It controls execution of the user program. In addition, various windows are opened from this window. Sets/displays the debugger environment Sets the memory banks Sets the mask options Sets/displays each extended option Sets/displays each option Sets the type and size of the display font in the Source window Reads debugging environment Saves the debugging environment Reads the display files of each window and the source text and event setting files Saves the display files of the current window and the event setting files Downloads the object files, binary files, and coverage results Saves the memory or coverage contents to a file Selects the files to be set in the Debugger Option and Source Search dialog boxes Specifies the files to be displayed in the Source window and the display start position Specifies the display start address for the Memory, Assemble, and Coverage windows Specifies the display start position for the Trace View window Displays the addresses and symbol values of variables and functions Displays source files and text files Searches a character string in a source file Displays the disassemble text and executes on-line assemble Searches the contents of the Assemble window Displays/changes the memory contents Searches the contents of the Memory window Initializes the memory contents by specified data Page p.60 Configuration dialog box Bank Set dialog box Mask Option dialog box Extended Option dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Font dialog box Project File Load dialog box Project File Save dialog box View File Load dialog box View File Save dialog box Download dialog box Upload dialog box Browse dialog box Source Move dialog box p.86 p.91 p.95 p.97 p.101 p.109 p.112 p.115 p.119 p.122 p.128 p.132 p.135 p.137 Address Move dialog box p.140 Trace Move dialog box Symbol To Address dialog box Source window Source Search dialog box Assemble window Assemble Search dialog box Memory window Memory Search dialog box Memory Fill dialog box p.143 p.146 p.149 p.162 p.165 p.176 p.179 p.184 p.187 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 57 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6-1. Windows of ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS Debuggers (2/2) Window Name Memory Copy dialog box Memory Compare dialog box Memory Compare Result dialog box Watch window Quick Watch dialog box Add Watch dialog box Register window SFR window SFR Select dialog box Add I/O Port dialog box Local Variable window Stack window Trace View window Trace Search dialog box Trace Data Select dialog box Coverage window Coverage Search dialog box Coverage Clear dialog box Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box Event Manager Software Break Manager Event dialog box Event Link dialog box Break dialog box Trace dialog box Snap Shot dialog box Timer dialog box Copies the memory contents Compares the memory contents Displays the result of comparison of memory contents Displays/changes variables Displays/changes variable values temporarily Registers variables to be displayed in the Watch window Displays/changes register (program register, system register) contents Displays/changes contents of SFR Selects SFRs and I/O ports to be displayed in the SFR window Registers I/O ports to be displayed in the SFR window Displays/changes local variable in current function Displays/changes the stack contents of the current user program Displays the trace results Searches the trace data Selects items to be displayed in the Trace View window Displays the coverage results Searches the coverage results Clears the coverage results Sets the coverage efficiency of the measurement range Displays the coverage results in terms of efficiency Displays, switches enable/disable, or deletes each event Displays, switches enable/disable, or deletes a software break Registers/displays an event condition Registers/displays an event link condition Registers/sets/displays a break event condition Registers/sets/displays a trace event condition Registers/sets/displays a snap event condition Displays the result of execution time measurement and registers/sets/displays timer event conditions Displays the results of the executed measurement Sets dynamic memory modification Sets the pass count Sets the delay count Initializes the ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS, and target CPU and symbol information Displays the version of the ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS Terminates the ID78K0-NS, ID78K0S-NS Displays an error/warning message Outline Page p.189 p.191 p.193 p.195 p.200 p.204 p.207 p.211 p.215 p.218 p.221 p.223 p.227 p.236 p.244 p.247 p.252 p.256 p.258 p.261 p.264 p.273 p.276 p.288 p.296 p.303 p.313 p.327 Timer Result dialog box DMM dialog box Pass Count dialog box Delay Count dialog box Reset Debugger dialog box About dialog box Exit Debugger dialog box Error/Warning dialog box p.337 p.339 p.345 p.347 p.349 p.351 p.352 p.354 58 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6.2 Explanation of Windows This section explains each window using the format shown below. Window Name The window name is indicated in this frame. General Briefly explains the window. Opening method Explains how to open the window. Window Shows the screen image of the window configuration. Function Explains each function of the window. Function buttons Explains the operations of the function buttons in the window. Menu bar Enumerates the menus pulled down from the menu bar, and explains the function of each menu. Caution Explains points of caution to be noted. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 59 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Main Window General This window is automatically opened after the ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS is started and initialization is complete. It remains displayed until the ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS is terminated. Various windows are opened and manipulated from this window. Execution of the user program is also controlled in this window. Execution of the user program can be controlled in three modes: source mode, instruction mode, and automatic mode. * Source mode Debugging is performed at the source level. * Instruction mode Debugging is performed at the instruction level. * Automatic mode Switches automatically between the source mode and instruction mode. This window is in the source mode (other than mixed display mode) or the instruction mode when the Source window is active and in the instruction mode when the Assemble window is active. When neither window is active, this window is in the source mode. When starting the ID78K0-NS/ID78K0S-NS, the automatic mode is assumed. Window Figure 6-1. Main Window (1) Toolbar (2) Window display area (3) Status display area 60 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function The main window consists of the following areas. * Menu bar * Toolbar * Window display area * Status display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Toolbar The toolbar consists of buttons that can execute frequently used commands with a single click. Each button is graphically displayed and easy to understand. This button group can be switched between "Graphics-only buttons" and "Graphics + Text buttons" by the Debugger Option dialog box. The function of each button can also be executed using the menu bar in this window. This toolbar is not shown when it is specified not to be displayed by selecting [Option] [Tool Bar] from the menu bar of this window. Figure 6-2. Toolbar Graphics-only toolbar Graphics + text toolbar An explanation of each button is given below. This button stops execution of the user program. The same function as [Run] [Stop] on the menu bar. This button runs the user program after the emulation CPU is reset. The same function as [Run] [Restart] on the menu bar. This button runs the user program without resetting the emulation CPU. The same function as [Run] [Go] on the menu bar. This button executes the program in real-time until execution returns to the calling function. The same function as [Run] [Return Out] on the menu bar. This button is used for step execution. By clicking this button successively, the program is executed by as many steps as the number of times this button is clicked. Step execution is performed in line units in the source mode, and in instruction units in the instruction mode. The same function as [Run] [Step In] on the menu bar. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 61 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This button executes the next step (i.e. executes the program, regarding the function/call statement as one step.). By clicking this button successively, next step execution is performed as many times as the number of times this button is clicked. Next step execution is performed in line units in the source mode, and in instruction units in the instruction mode. The same function as [Run] [Next Over] on the menu bar. This button resets the emulation CPU. The same function as [Run] [CPU Reset] on the menu bar. This button opens the View File Load dialog box. The same function as [File] [Open...] on the menu bar. This button opens the Download dialog box. The same function as [File] [Download...] on the menu bar. This button opens the Project File Load dialog box. The same function as [File] [Project] [Open...] on the menu bar. This button opens the Source window and displays the contents of the source text. The same function as [Browse] [Source Text] on the menu bar. This button opens the Assemble window, where the user program is disassembled and displayed. The same function as [Browse] [Assemble] on the menu bar. This button opens the Memory window and displays the memory contents. The same function as [Browse] [Memory] on the menu bar. This button opens the Watch window and displays the watch contents. The same function as [Browse] [Watch] on the menu bar. This button opens the Register window and displays the contents of the registers. The same function as [Browse] [Register] on the menu bar. This button opens the SFR window and displays the contents of the SFRs. The same function as [Browse] [SFR] on the menu bar. This button opens the Local Variable window and displays the local variable contents. The same function as [Browse] [Local Variable] on the menu bar. This button opens the Stack window and displays the contents of the stack. The same function as [Browse] [Stack Trace] on the menu bar. 62 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This button opens the Trace View window and displays the result of a trace. The same function as [Browse] [Trace] on the menu bar. This button opens the Coverage window and displays the coverage measurement results The same function as [Browse] [Coverage] on the menu bar. This button opens the Event Manager. The same function as [Event] [Event Manager] on the menu bar. This button opens the Event dialog box and registers or sets events. The same function as [Event] [Event...] on the menu bar. This button opens the Break dialog box and registers, sets, or displays break events. The same function as [Event] [Break...] on the menu bar. This button opens the Trace dialog box and registers, sets, or displays trace events. The same function as [Event] [Trace...] on the menu bar. This button opens the Timer dialog box, registers, sets, or displays timer events, and displays the result of timer measurement. The same function as [Event] [Timer...] on the menu bar. Note Valid only when the performance board is mounted. (a) Tool hint function If the mouse cursor is pointed at any of the buttons on the toolbar, a tool hint pops up after a few seconds. Figure 6-3. Example of Tool Hint Note . (b) Moving the toolbar By dragging toolbar with the mouse, it can be moved to any desired position within or outside the main window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 63 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Window display area This area displays various debug windows. The displayed window can be changed in size or registered as an icon in this area. The list of the windows displayed in this area is as follows. * Source window * Assemble window * Watch window * Memory window * Register window * SFR window (3) Status display area Figure 6-4. Status Bar * Local variable window * Stack window * Trace View window * Coverage window * Event Manager <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> This area displays the status of the debugger and in-circuit emulator. <1> Program name $ Source name # Line No. Program name: Source name: Line No.: <2> Function name: <3> PC value: <4> CPU status: <5> IE status: Displays the program file name indicated by the PC value. Displays the source file name indicated by the PC value. Displays the line number indicated by the PC value. Displays the function name indicated by the PC value. Displays the current PC value. Displays the status of the CPU (target device) (not displayed in the ID78K0-NS). Displays the status of the in-circuit emulator (RUN, BREAK mode). Displays the character "|" as a delimiter if there are multiple states. <6> Break cause: <7> STEP mode: <8> Key input mode: Displays the cause of the break. Displays the step execution mode. Displays the key input mode. 64 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The types of IE and CPU statuses are shown below. Table 6-2. IE Status Display Contents Status Indication RUN STEP TRC TIM COV BREAK Meaning Currently running a user program. Currently executing a step. Currently operating a trace. Currently operating a timer. Currently operating coverage. Break Table 6-3. CPU Status Display Contents Status Indication STANDBY H-STOP POW OFF In standby mode In hardware stop mode Power is not supplied to the target system Meaning The causes of a break are as follows. Table 6-4. Display Contents of Break Cause Displayed Cause Manual Break Temporary Break Event Break Software Break Non Map Break Write Protect SFR Illegal Stack Overflow Forcible break Temporary break Break by event Break by software break event Access in non-map area Write access to write-protected area Illegal access to SFR Break by stack overflow Meaning The types of STEP modes are shown below. Table 6-5. STEP Modes STEP Mode SRC INST Meaning STEP execution is in the source mode. This is displayed when [Option] [Source Mode] in the menu bar is selected. STEP execution is in the instruction mode. This is displayed when [Option] [Instruction Mode] in the menu bar is selected. STEP execution is in the automatic mode. This is displayed when [Option] [Auto Mode] on the menu bar is selected. AUTO The types of key input modes are shown below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 65 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6-6. Key Input Modes Key Input Mode INS OVR Meaning Displayed when key input is in the insert mode. Displayed when key input is in the overwrite mode. (a) Menu explanation display function While selecting a menu item on the menu bar with the mouse, a simple explanation of the highlighted item in the menu is displayed on the left end of the status bar. Also, when the mouse cursor is pointed at any of the buttons on the toolbar, a menu explanation corresponding to that button is displayed. Figure 6-5. Example of Menu Explanation Display 66 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Menu bar (1) File Figure 6-6. File Menu Bar [Open...] This loads the display file or a source file or text file. Opens the View File Load dialog box. Operation differs depending on the file type selected in the dialog box. When it is a source file in which symbol information is read: Files are displayed in the Source window. When it is an event setting file (.EVN): The Event Manager is opened and the event is set. When it is a source file in which symbol information is not read, or a display file: Files are displayed in the Source window as text format files. [Save As...] Saves the displayed contents of the current window in a file under another name. Opens the View File Save dialog box. [Close] [Download...] Closes the current window. Downloads the program. Opens the Download dialog box. [Upload...] Uploads the program. Opens the Upload dialog box. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 67 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Project >] [Open...] Operates a project file. Opens a project file. Opens the Project File Load dialog box. [Save] Overwrites the current status to the project file. The file to be overwritten is the project file that is currently being read in the debugger. [Save As...] Saves the current status in a project file. Opens the Project File Save dialog box. [Debugger Reset...] Resets the target CPU, symbols, and debugger. Opens the Reset Debugger dialog box. [Exit] [Open File] Terminates the debugger. Opens the Exit Debugger dialog box. Displays a list of the downloaded files. If a file name is selected, that file is downloaded again. (2) Edit Figure 6-7. Edit Menu Bar [Cut] [Copy] [Paste] [Write in] [Restore] [Memory >] [Fill...] Cuts the selected character string and places it in the clipboard buffer. Copies the selected character string to the clipboard buffer. Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer at the text cursor position. Writes corrections to the target. Cancels the correction. Manipulates the memory contents. Initializes the memory contents. Opens the Memory Fill dialog box. 68 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Copy...] Copies values from memory to memory. Opens the Memory Copy dialog box. [Compare...] Compares values between memories. Opens the Memory Compare dialog box. [Edit Source] When the Project Manager is operating, opens the source file displayed in an active Source window by using the editor specified by the Project Manager. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 69 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) View The display menu consists of a common part, in which the menu items are common to all windows and a dependent part, in which the menu items differ according to the active window. An explanation of each dependent part is given in (b) to (k). Figure 6-8. View Menu Bar Note Note Note The Coverage window is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NSA/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. 70 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) Common part Performs a search. Opens the search dialog box according to the current window. Performs the same operation as the Search button. [Move...] Moves the display position. window. [Quick Watch...] Displays the contents of the specified data temporarily. Watch dialog box. [Add Watch...] Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. [View Watch] Adds the selected data to the Watch window. In the case of a symbol, it adds it in accordance with the settings in the Debugger Option dialog box. [Delete Watch] Deletes the selected watch point from the Watch window. This menu is active only when variables are specified in the Watch window. [Symbol...] Displays the address of the specified variable or function and the value of the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box. Opens the Quick Opens the Source Move dialog box, Address [Search...] Move dialog box or Trace Move dialog box corresponding to the current (b) Source window dependent part [Event?] Displays the cursor position line or the address's event information. If an event is set, it opens the Event dialog box. [Mix] Switches between mixed display and no mixed display for the assemble display. No check mark (" "): No mixed display (default). Check mark (""): Mixed display. (c) Assemble window dependent part [Event?] Displays event information for the cursor position address. If an event is set, it opens the Event dialog box. (d) Memory window dependent part [Bin] [Oct] [Dec] [Hex] Displays the current window in binary. Displays the current window in octal. Displays the current window in decimal. Displays the current window in hexadecimal (default). User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 71 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Nibble] [Byte] [Word] [Double Word] [Ascii] Displays data in 4-bit units. Displays data in 8-bit units (default). Displays data in 16-bit units. Displays data in 32-bit units. Turns ON/OFF display of ASCII characters. No check mark (" "): Not displayed. Check mark (""): Displayed (default). (e) Watch window dependent part [Bin] [Oct] [Dec] [Hex] [String] [Proper] The selected item is displayed in binary. The selected item is displayed in octal. The selected item is displayed in decimal. The selected item is displayed in hexadecimal. The selected item is displayed as a character string. The selected item is displayed as the standard value for each variable. In the case of symbols, they are displayed in accordance with the settings in the Debugger Option dialog box (default). [Byte] [Word] [Double Word] [Adaptive] The selected item is displayed in 8-bit units. The selected item is displayed in 16-bit units. The selected item is displayed in 32-bit units. The selected item is displayed as standard values for each variable. In the case of C language symbols, only this item is valid. In the case of assembler symbols, they are displayed in accordance with the settings in the Debugger Option dialog box. [Up] [Down] [Compulsion Read] The selected data is moved 1 line up. The selected data is moved 1 line down. The data in the SFRs, where reading is prohibited because the values will change if they are read, the I/O ports added in the Add I/O Port dialog box, and the I/O protected areas is subjected to compulsory reading. 72 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (f) Register window dependent part [Bin] [Oct] [Dec] [Hex] [Absolute Name] [Function Name] Displayed in binary. Displayed in octal. Displayed in decimal. Displayed in hexadecimal (default). Displays register names as absolute names. Displays register names as function names (default). (g) SFR window dependent part [Bin] [Oct] [Dec] [Hex] [Sort By Name] [Sort By Address] [UnSort] [Attribute] Displayed in binary. Displayed in octal. Displayed in decimal. Displayed in hexadecimal (default). Displayed in alphabetical order. Displayed in address order (default). Not sorted. Selects whether to display or not to display the Attribute field. No check mark (" "): Not displayed. Check mark (""): Displayed (default). [Pick Up] Only the SFR selected in the SFR Select dialog box is displayed. No check mark (" "): All are displayed (default). Check mark (""): The selected register only is displayed. [Select...] [Compulsion Read] Opens the SFR Select dialog box. The data in the SFRs, where reading is prohibited because the values will change if they are read, the I/O ports added in the Add I/O Port dialog box, and the I/O protected areas is subjected to compulsory reading. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 73 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (h) Local Variable window dependent part, Stack window dependent part [Bin] [Oct] [Dec] [Hex] [String] [Proper] Displayed in binary. Displayed in octal. Displayed in decimal. Displayed in hexadecimal. Displayed as a character string. Displayed as the standard value for each variable (default). (i) Trace View window dependent part [Select...] Selects the content of the display. Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box. [Pick Up >] [Off] [Search] [Snap] [BRM1] Performs pick up display settings. Pick up display is not performed (default). Picks up the frames which match the search conditions and displays them. Picks up snap frames and displays them. Picks up the first M1 fetch frame after a program branch and displays it (BRM1 cannot be set in this version). [Mix] Switches between mixed display or no mixed display of sources. No check mark (" "): Check mark (""): No mixed display (default). Mixed display. [Window Synchronize >] [Source Text] This links together the Trace View window and Source window, Assemble window, Memory window and Coverage window. Selects whether the Source window will be linked or not linked. No check mark (" "): Check mark (""): Not linked (default). Linked. [Assemble] Selects whether the Assemble window will be linked or not linked. No check mark (" "): Check mark (""): Not linked (default). Linked. [Memory] Selects whether the Memory window will be linked or not linked. No check mark (" "): Check mark (""): Not linked (default). Linked. 74 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Coverage] Note Selects whether the Coverage window will be linked or not linked. No check mark (" "): Check mark (""): Not linked (default). Linked. (j) Coverage window dependent part Note [1 Byte] [64 Bytes] Displays in 1-byte units (default). Displays in 64-byte units (default). (k) Event Manager dependent part [Select All Event] [Delete Event] [Sort By Name] [Sort By Kind] [UnSort] [Detail] [Overview] Selects all the events entered in the Event Manager. Deletes the selected event. Displays the icons sorted by event name. Displays the icons sorted by event kind. Icons are not sorted (default). Displays details. Displays a list. Note The Coverage window is displayed only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 75 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Option Figure 6-9. Option Menu Bar [Tool Bar] Selects whether the toolbar is displayed or not. No check mark (" "): Not displayed. Check mark (""): Displayed (default). [Status Bar] Selects whether the status bar is displayed or not. No check mark (" "): Not displayed. Check mark (""): Displayed (default). [Button] Selects whether the function buttons on each window are displayed or not. No check mark (" "): Not displayed. Check mark (""): Displayed (default). [Source Mode] [Instruction Mode] [Auto Mode] Performs step execution at the source level (line units). Performs step execution at the instruction level (instruction units). Switches automatically between source level step execution and instruction level step execution, and executes step execution (default). When the Source window is active, source level step execution (except in the mixed display mode) or instruction level step execution (in the mixed display mode) is performed, and when the Assemble window is active, instruction level step execution is performed. When neither window is active, source level step execution is performed. [Configuration...] Sets the environment. Opens the Configuration dialog box. 76 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Mask Option...] Specifies the mask option for the device and sets the mode of each pin. Opens the Mask Option dialog box. [Extended Option...] Sets the extended functions. Opens the Extended Option dialog box. [Debugger Option...] Sets the debugger. Opens the Debugger Option dialog box. [Add I/O Port...] Adds a user-defined I/O port. Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box. [Trace Clear] Note Clears the trace data. Displays the Trace View window if it is active. [Coverage >] [Clear...] Note Opens the coverage-measurement related dialog boxes. Initializes the coverage measurement results. Opens the Coverage-Clear dialog box. Note [Condition...] Note Sets the coverage efficiency measurement conditions. Opens the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box. [Efficiency...] Note Displays the coverage efficiency results. Opens the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box. [Coverage ON] Note Selects whether coverage measurement is turned on or off. During emulation, this setting cannot be changed. No check mark (" "): Coverage measurement is not performed. Check mark (""): Coverage measurement is performed (default). [Timer ON] Note Selects whether the timer measurement is turned on or off. During emulation, this setting cannot be changed. No Check Mark (" "): Timer measurement is not performed. Check Mark (""): Timer measurement is performed (default). Note that Run-Break event timer measurement cannot be stopped. Note These functions are valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NSA/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 77 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (5) Run Figure 6-10. Run Menu Bar [Restart] Executes the program after resetting the emulation CPU. Performs the same operation as the button. [Stop] Forcibly stops execution of the program. Performs the same operation as the button. [Go] Executes the program without resetting the CPU. operation as the button. Performs the same [Return Out] Executes the program in real time until execution returns to the calling function. Performs the same operation as the button. button. In [Step In] Performs step execution. Performs the same operation as the mode, it is executed in instruction units. the source mode, the program is executed in line units, and in the instruction [Next Over] Performs next step execution. Performs the same operation as the button. Executes the program, regarding a function or subroutine statement as 1 step. In the source mode, the program is executed in line units, and in the instruction mode, it is executed in instruction units. [Start From Here] Executes the program from the cursor position of the Source window or Assemble window. 78 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Come Here] Executes the program until the cursor position of the Source window or Assemble window. [Go & Go] Continues execution of the program. If a break occurs because a break condition is satisfied, it updates the window and then executes the user program again. Performs the same operation as clicking the time a break occurs. [Slowmotion] Continues step execution of the program. After updating the window for each step execution, it performs step execution again. Performs the same operation as clocking the execution is performed. [CPU Reset] [Change PC] Resets the emulation CPU. Performs the same operation as the button. button each time step button each Sets the address at the cursor position of the Source window or Assemble window to the PC. [Break Point] Sets/cancels a breakpoint at the cursor position of the Source window or Assemble window. [Software Break Point] Sets/cancels a software breakpoint at the cursor position of the Source window or Assemble window. [Delete All Software Break] [Uncond. Trace ON] Cancels all software breakpoints that are set. Validates the unconditional trace function. program is being executed (default). When the tracer is started, the trace mode cannot be changed. Always traces while the user [Cond. Trace ON] Validates the trace function. Traces while the user program is being executed according to a trace condition. When the tracer is started, the trace mode cannot be changed. [Coverage Start or Coverage Stop] Note When coverage measurement is stopped, this starts it. When coverage measurement is being performed, this stops it. The display definitions are as follows. "Coverage Start": Measurement is stopped. If selected, measurement will be started. "Coverage Stop": Measurement is in progress. If selected, measurement will be stopped. If there is currently no emulation, and if coverage measurement is off (no "" mark next to the [Option] [Coverage ON] item), this item is invalid (it is dimmed). Coverage measurement starts operating immediately after coverage has been turned on and emulation is started. Note This function is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 79 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Timer Start or Timer Stop] When timer measurement is stopped, this starts it. When timer measurement is being performed, this stops it. The display definitions are as follows. "Timer Start": Measurement is stopped. started. "Timer Stop": Measurement is in progress. If selected, measurement will be stopped. If there is currently no emulation, and if timer events are not used (no "" mark next to the [Ignore Break Point] [Run] item), this item is invalid (it is dimmed). Timer measurement starts operating immediately after the timer has been turned on and emulation is started. If selected, measurement will be [Tracer Start or Tracer Stop] When tracer measurement is stopped, this starts it. When tracer measurement is being performed, this stops it. The display definitions are as follows. "Tracer Start": Measurement is stopped. started. "Tracer Stop": Measurement is in progress. If selected, measurement will be stopped. If there is currently no emulation, and if breaks are ignored (no "" mark next to the [Run] [Ignore Break Point] item), this item is invalid (it is dimmed). Tracer measurement starts operating immediately after the tracer has been turned on and emulation is started. If selected, measurement will be [Ignore Break Point] This selects whether to make a breakpoint valid or invalid. If it is made invalid, the breakpoint does not cause a break to occur. No check mark (" "): Valid (default) Check mark (""): Invalid During emulation, this setting cannot be switched. (6) Event Figure 6-11. Event Menu Bar 80 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Event Manager] Manages each type of event condition. Opens the Event Manager. Operates the same as the button. [Software Break Manager] [Event...] Note Switches enable/disable and cancels software break. Opens the Software Break Manager. Enters event conditions. Opens the Event dialog box. Operates the same as the button. [Event Link...] Enters event link conditions. Opens the Event Link dialog box. [Break...] Enters and sets break conditions. Opens the Break dialog box. Operates the same as the button. [Trace...] Enters and sets trace event conditions. Opens the Trace dialog box. Operates the same as the button. [Snap Shot...] Enters and sets snap event conditions. Opens the Snap Shot dialog box. [Timer...] Enters and sets timer event conditions and displays the measurement results. Opens the Timer dialog box. Operates the same as the button. [DMM...] Note Opens the DMM dialog box. Sets the pass count and displays the pass count value. Opens the Pass Count dialog box. [Pass Count...] [Delay Count...] Sets the delay count and displays the delay count value. Opens the Delay Count dialog box. Note These functions are valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NSA/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 81 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (7) Browse Figure 6-12. Browse Menu Bar [Source Text] Displays the source text. Opens the Source window. operation as the static state. button. Performs the same If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the [Assemble] Disassembles and displays the user program. Opens the Assemble window. Performs the same operation as the static state. button. If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the [Memory] Displays the memory contents. Opens the Memory window. Performs the same operation as the static state. button. If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the [Watch] Displays the watch contents (variable and other data). window. Performs the same operation as the button. Opens the Watch [Register] Displays the register contents. Opens the Register window. Performs the same operation as the button. [SFR] Displays the contents of the SFRs. Opens the SFR window. Performs the same operation as the button. [Local Variable] Displays the local variable. Opens the Local Variable window. Performs the same operation as the button. [Stack Trace] Displays the stack contents. Opens the Stack window. Performs the same operation as the button. 82 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE [Trace] Displays the result of a trace. Opens the Trace View window. Performs the same operation as the button. [Coverage] Note Displays the result of coverage measurement. Opens the Coverage window. Performs the same operation as the static state. button. If a window exists that is already in the active state, it opens the window in the Note This function is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. (8) Jump Figure 6-13. Jump Menu Bar [SourceText] Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays the source text and source line starting from that address. No jump can be performed if the jump address contains no line information. Opens the Source window. If the Source window is being displayed in the active state, that window is displayed on the front plane (operation object). [Assemble] Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays the disassembled text starting from that address. Opens the Assemble window. If the Assemble window is being displayed in the active state, that window is displayed on the front plane (operation object). [Memory] Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays the memory contents starting from that address. Opens the Memory window. If the Memory window is being displayed in the active state, that window is displayed on the front plane (operation object). [Coverage] Note Sets the data selected in the current window as the jump address, and displays the coverage measurement results from that window. Opens the Coverage window. If the Coverage window is being displayed in the active state, that window is displayed on the front plane (operation object). Note This function is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 83 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (9) Window Figure 6-14. Window Menu Bar [New Window] Opens a new window displaying the same contents as the current window. This is valid only in cases where the current window is the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window or Coverage window. [Cascade] [Tile] [Arrange Icons] [Close All] [Refresh] [Active] Cascades the windows in the main window. Tiles the windows in the main window. Rearranges the icons in the main window. Closes all the windows except the main window. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Switches the window to the active state. If it is currently in the active state, a check mark is entered on the left of this item. [Static] Switches the window to the static state. If it is currently in the static state, a check mark is entered on the left of this item. [Open window] Lists the opened windows. The window with a check mark added at the side of the number is the current window. The window selected by selecting a window name is displayed as the current window. 84 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (10) Help Figure 6-15. Help Menu Bar [Help Topics] [Main Window Help] [Current Window Help] [About...] Displays the table of contents of the Help window. Displays the help for the main window. Displays the help for the current window. Displays the version of the debugger. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 85 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Configuration Dialog Box General Displays and sets the operating environment of the in-circuit emulator. This dialog box is displayed automatically after the debugger is started. To use the debugger, the operating environment of the in-circuit emulator must be set first in this dialog box. When a project file is read, however, it doesn't need to be set. The result of reading the project file is reflected in the Configuration dialog box. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * When the debugger is started Automatically opened * In the main window Select [Option] [Configuration...]. Press the GRPH + O , and C keys in that order. Window Figure 6-16. Configuration Dialog Box (1) Emulation CPU select area (2) Internal ROM/RAM setting area (5) Break mode select area (3) CPU clock source select area (6) Mask setting area (4) Power supply select area (7) Mapping setting area 86 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function The Configuration dialog box consists of the following areas. * Emulation CPU select area * Internal ROM/RAM setting area * CPU clock source select area * Power supply select area * Break mode select area * Mask setting area * Mapping setting area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Emulation CPU select area This area selects an emulation CPU. one from the Name drop-down list. (2) Internal ROM/RAM setting area Note that this area can be selected only when the ID78K0-NS (ID78K0S-NS) is started. A chip name can be specified by inputting a name using the keyboard or selecting This area displays the size of the internal ROM and RAM of the emulation CPU. The default size is automatically displayed followed by an asterisk (*) when the emulation CPU is selected. To change the size of the internal ROM and RAM, select a size from the internal ROM and RAM drop-down list. If the selected size cannot be realized due to in-circuit emulator limitations, the debugger automatically adjusts the size. For that reason, when the Configuration dialog box is displayed again, the size being displayed may be greater than the size specified the previous time. Sizes that can be set are as follows. Size Part Number 78K/0 Series (ID78K0-NS) 78K/0S Series (ID78K0S-NS) Internal ROM Size Alignment (KB) 4 2 Set Range (KB) 0 to 64 0 to 8, 12 to 64 Internal RAM Size Alignment (Bytes) 64 Set Range (Bytes) 64 to 1, 024 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 87 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) CPU clock source select area This area selects the clock source to be input to the emulation CPU. Select one of the following. * Internal: The clock in the in-circuit emulator will be used as the CPU clock (default). * External: The clock of the target device will be used as the CPU clock. (4) Power supply select area This area selects the power supply to be input to the emulation CPU. Select one of the following. * Internal: * Target: The power supply in the in-circuit emulator is used as the operating voltage (default). The operation voltage is fixed to 5 V. The power supply of the target is used as the operating voltage. The operating voltage can be changed within the range of the device's specifications. (5) Break mode select area This area selects the peripheral emulation operation of the in-circuit emulator during a break. Select one of the following. * Break: * Non Break: Stops the peripheral emulation function during a break. Does not stop the peripheral emulation function during a break (default). 88 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (6) Mask setting area This area specifies a mask for the signal sent from the target. The signal of the masked pin cannot be input to the in-circuit emulator. Mask pins only when the operation of the target is unstable at the debugging stage. The RESET pin is the only pin for which a signal can be masked. (7) Mapping setting area This area specifies the mapping attribute and address, and sets mapping. (a) Mapping attribute specification The following types of mapping attributes can be selected. Select a suitable attribute. Note, however, that Emulation ROM, Emulation RAM, Target, and I/O Protect cannot be selected for devices without external space and ID78K0S-NS. Memory Attribute * Emulation ROM * Emulation RAM * Target * Stack: Note Note : Selects an in-circuit emulator alternate ROM. Selects a target memory. Note : Selects an in-circuit emulator alternate RAM. Selects an I/O protect area. Select a memory in the stack area. : Note * I/O Protect : Note Cannot be selected for the ID78K0S-NS. The I/O Protect area can only be set inside the area set in the Target and the external SFR area. The area set as I/O Protect cannot be read unless it has been registered as an I/O port in the SFR window, or registered in the Watch window. If it is necessary to read this area, execute a forcible read in these windows. (b) Mapping address specification Mapping Address: Specify the address to be mapped. Input the mapping-start address and the mapping-end address from the keyboard. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 89 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Setting of memory mapping * To add memory mapping After specifying the Memory Attribute and Mapping Address, click the is added. In ID78K0-NS, the mapping units for mapping attributes of other than Stack and I/O Protect are button is clicked. If the mapping units do not match, the minimum adjusted when the range subject to mapping that can be set, which includes the specified address, is used. Stack area is set only in the internal RAM area (cannot be set in the internal expansion RAM area). * To delete memory mapping Select the mapping to be deleted from the displayed area, then click the currently selected mapping will be deleted. Remark The mapping unit in the Stack and I/O Protect areas is bytes. button. The button. Memory mapping corresponding to the Memory Attribute and to the Memory Mapping address range Function buttons Validates the current environments. Sets environments and closes the Configuration dialog box. If an error occurs when the impossible to continue. Cancels change and closes this dialog box. This returns the environmental settings to the state they were in before the Configuration dialog box was opened. Opens the Project File Load dialog box. If a project file is open or if an error occurs during reading, the debugger stops because it is impossible to continue. Opens the help window that explains the Configuration dialog box. button is clicked, the debugger stops because it is 90 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Bank Set Dialog Box (ID78K0-NS only) General Sets the memory bank. Note, however, that the memory bank does not need to be set when reading the project file. The contents of the project file read are reflected in the Bank Set dialog box. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following method. * In the Extended Option dialog box Turn on "Memory Bank" in the Memory Bank area, then click the BANK Set button. Window Figure 6-17. Bank Set Dialog Box (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) Bank access port setting area Bank address setting area Bank address display unit setting area (4) (5) External sense clip select area SFR setting area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 91 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function The Bank Set dialog box consists of the following areas. * Bank access port setting area * Bank address setting area * Bank address display unit setting area * External sense clip select area * SFR select area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Bank access port setting area This area sets the port used to access the memory bank. (2) Bank address setting area This area sets the range within which the memory bank is switched. (3) Bank address display unit setting area This area sets display unit for the memory bank address. (4) External sense clip select area This area selects whether use the external sense clip for the memory bank or not. 92 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Setting Debugger use Description The external sense clip is used by the debugger for event setting and address creation during trace display for the memory bank area. The user can freely set in this area. Note, however, that event setting and trace display may be illegal for the memory bank. User use When checking "Debugger use" to use the external sense clip, ports correspond to external sense clips as follows. Bank Port Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 External Sense Clip No. No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 (5) SFR setting area This area sets the access ports, memory expansion mode, and external bus type selection registers for memory bank access. The SFRs that need to be specified are shown below. Setting Pxx Description Specify the port used to access the memory bank. Specify when the port for memory bank access is set as an output port. Set the external expansion area and number of waits. Set the external bus type. Remarks Specify in the access port setting area. PMxx This is set automatically by the debugger. - MM EBTSO - User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 93 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Sets the specified memory bank and closes the Bank Set dialog box. Closes the Bank Set dialog box. Restores the input data. Opens the help window. 94 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Mask Option Dialog Box General Sets the mask option. Note, however, that the mask option does not need to be set when reading the project file. The contents of the project file read are reflected in the Mask Option dialog box. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Mask option] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + O , and M keys in that order. Window Figure 6-18. Mask Option Dialog Box (1) Pin group setting area (1) Mask option setting area Function The Mask Option dialog box consists of the following areas. * Pin group setting area * Mask option setting area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 95 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The function of each area is explained below. (1) Pin group setting area This area sets the pin group. (2) Mask option setting area This area sets the mask option of the device and specifies the pin mode. When this dialog box is opened, the setting option/specified pin mode is displayed at the top. Function buttons Sets the specified mask option/pin mode and closes the Mask Option dialog box. Closes the Mask Option dialog box. Set the specified mask option/pin mode. Restores the input data. Opens the help window. 96 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Extended Option Dialog Box General Displays and sets the various extended options of the debugger. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Extended Option...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + O , and E keys in that order. Window Figure 6-19. Extended Option Dialog Box (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) Trace time tag counter division ratio select area Note 1 Note 1 (5) (6) (7) (8) Flash self mode setting area Default break select area Notes 1, 2 Time tag total specification area setting area Beep sound specification area Memory bank setting area Note 2 Real-time internal RAM sampling time Real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area Note 2 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 97 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Notes 1. 2. This function is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NSA/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. Valid only for the ID78K0-NS. Function The Extended Option dialog box consists of the following areas. * Trace time tag counter division ratio select area * Time tag total specification area Note 1 Note 1 * Real-time internal RAM sampling time setting area * Real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area (ID78K0-NS only) * Flash self mode setting area * Default break select area Note 2 (ID78K0-NS only) Note 3 * Beep sound specification area * Memory bank setting area (ID78K0-NS only) Notes 1. 2. 3. Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NSA is used. Valid only for devices supporting flash self mode. Valid only for product with new packages (IE-78K0-NS with a control code D or later or the IE-78K0NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A). The function of each area is explained below. (1) Trace time tag counter division ratio select area This area sets the division ratio of the counter to be used as time tag display in Trace View window. Select the division ratio from the drop-down list. The following division ratios can be selected. Numeric value on drop down list: 1 (default value) to 65,536 When a division ratio has been set, the number of clocks necessary for counting the counter displayed by time tag is changed. (2) Time tag total specification area If this check box is checked, the trace data time tags will be totaled. The default is an unchecked box, and therefore no totaling of time tags. 98 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Real-time internal RAM sampling time setting area This area specifies the sampling time (ms) of the real-time internal RAM sampling. During emulation, the range specified in the real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area can be sampled in real time. Variables, data, etc. allocated to this range can be viewed in real time in the Watch window and the Memory window. Sampling time can be specified from 0 to 65500 in 100 ms units. Real-time display is not performed if the sampling time is set at 0 or is left blank. (4) Real-time internal RAM sampling range setting area (ID78K0-NS only) This area specifies the range of the real-time internal RAM sampling. Variables, data, etc. allocated to this range can be viewed in real time in the Watch window and the Memory window. The addresses can be specified in arbitrary 2 KB units. (5) Flash self mode setting area (ID78K0-NS only) This area sets the flash self mode. The default setting for this area is "Off" (i.e. not flash self mode). (6) Default break select area Whether to make the breakpoint setting a software break or a hardware break can be selected by clicking the mouse in the Source window or Assemble window. * Soft Break: Sets a software break. The breakpoint mark is displayed in blue. * Hard Break: Sets a hardware break. The breakpoint mark is displayed in red. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 99 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (7) Beep sound specification area This area specifies whether there will be a beep sound when there is a break. If the check box is checked, a beep sound is emitted when there is a break (the default is with the beep sound activated). (8) Memory bank setting area (ID78K0-NS only) This area sets the memory bank. The default setting for this area is "Off" (i.e. memory bank function is not used). If the BANK Set button is clicked, the Bank Set dialog box is displayed. Function buttons Makes the currently set environment active. Sets the environment and closes the Extended Option dialog box. Cancels the change contents and closes the Extended Option dialog box. Returns to the environmental setting state that existed before the Extended Option dialog box was opened. Opens the help window that explains the Extended Option dialog box. 100 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Debugger Option Dialog Box General Displays and sets each type of extended option in the debugger. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Debugger Option...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + O , and D keys in that order. Window Figure 6-20. Debugger Option Dialog Box (1) (2) (9) (3) (4) (10) (5) (6) (11) (12) (7) (13) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Source path specification area Default source specification area Default load module specification area Open file history setting area Display font setting area Project file setting area Toolbar display button setting area (8) Kanji code setting area (9) Tab size setting area (10) Startup symbol setting area (11)Offset display setting area (12)Register name display select area (13)Watch symbol setting area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 101 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function The Debugger Option dialog box consists of the following areas. * Source path specification area * Default source specification area * Default load module specification area * Open file history setting area * Tab size setting area * Project file setting area * Toolbar display button setting area * Kanji code setting area * Display font setting area * Startup symbol setting area * Offset display setting area * Register name display select area * Watch symbol setting area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Source path specification area This area specifies the directory in which the source file or text files will be searched for. The path is specified by inputting it from the keyboard or by using the When the added. A relative path can also be specified. The directory that is the reference for the relative path is displayed to the right of "Base:". The reference directory is decided using the following procedure. * The directory from which the project files were loaded. * The directory from which the latest load module or hex file was loaded. * Windows current directory. Delimiters in path information are specified by " " (blank), ";" (semi-colon), or "," (comma). Japanese characters can be specified in the source path (Japanese version only). Example If the source is located in the following directory, b:\src c:\asm The source path specification becomes as follows. b:\src;c:\asm button. button is clicked, the Browse dialog box is displayed and the source path can be 102 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Default source specification area When [File] [Open...] is selected and the Browse dialog box is opened, the file extension of the displayed source file is set in this area. File extension delimiters are specified by " " (blank), ";" (semi-colon), or "," (comma). (3) Default load module specification area This area sets the file extension of the load module displayed when the Download dialog box is opened. File extension delimiters are specified by " " (blank), ";" (semi-colon), or "," (comma). (4) Open file history setting area This area sets the number of items in the history displayed at the bottom of the [File] menu. The number of items that can be set range from 0 to 10. When 0 is set, the history is not displayed on the menu. The default is 4. (5) Display font setting area This area specifies the display font in the Source window. If the button is clicked, the Font dialog box opens and the display font can be selected. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 103 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (6) Project file setting area This area sets the project file auto save and auto load. (a) Project file auto save Selection can be made from among the following items. Auto Save: On: Off: Performs project file auto save when closing. Does not perform project file auto save when closing. Query: Displays the Exit Debugger dialog box when closing (default). (b) Project file auto load Selection can be made from among the following items. Auto Load: On: Off: Performs project file auto load when starting. Does not perform project file auto load when starting (default). (c) Auto load project file settings Specifies the project file to be loaded during auto load. This can be specified when "Auto Load" has been turned "On." When it is turned "Off," the specification column becomes inactive (dimmed). Load Project File: Input the project file name from the keyboard or set it by clicking the button. If the (7) Toolbar display button setting area button is clicked, the Browse dialog box is displayed. This area sets the toolbar display buttons. The display buttons can be selected from among the following items. Pictures only: Pictures and Text: Displays buttons which show only graphics (default). Displays buttons which show both graphics and text. 104 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (8) Kanji code setting area This area specifies the kanji code of the files displayed in the Source window or Trace View window. Kanji code can be selected from the following. Sjis: Euc: SJIS is used for the kanji code (default). EUC is used for the kanji code. The kanji code is valid only for Japanese Windows. (9) Tab size setting area This area sets the tab size for each file extension when displaying files with that file extension. (a) File extension setting Set the file extension. Extension: Setting of the file extension can be done by inputting it from the keyboard or by selecting from the drop-down list. (b) Tab size selection The following tab sizes can be selected. Tab Size: 2: Displays the tab code with 2 spaces. 4: Displays the tab code with 4 spaces. 8: Displays the tab code with 8 spaces. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 105 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Setting tab size for each file extension Tab List: Displays a list of the file extensions and tab sizes. * If a tab size setting is added, and if a tab size is changed, set it by "Extension" and "Tab Size", then click the button. * To delete a tab size setting, Select the file extension setting in the "Tab List," then click the The currently selected file extension setting is deleted. (10) Startup symbol setting area button. This area specifies the beginning symbol (Begin label) and the end symbol (End label) of the startup routine. If it is left blank, the Debugger Option dialog box cannot be closed. The default is as follows. Begin Label: End Label: _@cstart _@cend (11) Offset display setting area This area sets whether there will be an offset display (symbol + offset) during disassemble display. If there is no offset display, a symbol is displayed only when there is a symbol that matches the numerical value, and when there is not a matching symbol, the numerical value is displayed as is in hex notation. The areas where the offset display can be specified are of the following two types. Label: Mnemonic: Sets whether or not there will be an offset display in the label column. The default is no offset display. Sets whether or not there will be offset display in the mnemonic column. The default is offset display. 106 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (12) Register name display selection area This area selects the display method of the register name in the mnemonic during disassemble display. The display method can be selected from the following two methods. Function Name: Absolute Name: Displays the register name as a function name or alias (default). Displays the register name as an absolute name. (13) Watch symbol setting area This area specifies the watch symbol. (a) Default size Set the display size of data specified as "Adaptive" in the Watch window, etc. The size displayed can be selected from among the following items. Size: Byte: Word: Double Word: (b) Default radix Set the display radix of data specified as "Proper" in the Watch window, etc. The display radix can be selected from among the following items. Radix: Bin: Oct: Dec: Hex: String: Displayed in binary. Displayed in octal. Displayed in decimal. Displayed in hexadecimal (default). Displayed as a character string. Displays data in 8 bits (default). Displays data in 16 bits. Displays data in 32 bits. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 107 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Variable type display on/off Set the variable type display on/off. Show Variable Type: On: Off: Displays variable types. Does not display variable types (default). (d) Variable display format (ID78K0-NS only) C: ASM: Displays in C language format. Displays in assembly format. Function buttons After activating each type of option in the set debugger, the dialog box is closed. Each of the options set in the debugger on this occasion are made inactive and the dialog box is closed. Returns to the environment setting state existing before the Debugger Option dialog box was opened. Opens the help window for the Debugger Option dialog box. 108 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Font Dialog Box General Selects the display font for the Source window and sets the font size. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following method. * Click the button in the Debugger Option dialog box. Window Figure 6-21. Font Dialog Box (1) Font name specification area (2) Font size specification area (3) Sample display area Function The Font dialog box consists of the following areas. * Font name specification area * Font size specification area * Sample display area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 109 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Font name specification area This area selects the specified font from among the currently usable fonts. Fixed-width fonts (fonts with a constant stroke width and fixed-pitch fonts) only are listed. When the font name is selected from the list, the font name is displayed in the edit box and the font sizes with which that font can be used are displayed in the font size specification area. It is also possible to type the font name directly in the edit box using the keyboard. (2) Font size specification area The usable sizes of the font specified in the font name specification area are listed in point units in this area. When selecting the font size from the list, the size is displayed in the edit box. It is also possible to type the font size directly in the edit box using the keyboard. (3) Sample display area This area displays sample character string showing the specified font and font size. 110 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Changes the font in the Source window to the specified font face and font size and closes the dialog box. Closes the dialog box without changing the font. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 111 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project File Load Dialog Box General Restores previous debugging environments. The size of the window and the position of the environments in the window are also restored following the project file load. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Project...] [Open Project...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , J , and O keys in that order. * Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-22. Project File Load Dialog Box (1) File location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area 112 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Loads project files. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * File location select area * File name select area * File kind select area The function of each area is explained below. (1) File location select area This area selects the drive or directory. (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. (3) File kind select area This area displays the kind of file displayed in the list. Project (*.prj) files are displayed. Loaded contents The items from each window shown in the following table are loaded in the project file. However, if the files are loaded after the debugger is started, when a project file with a different target device is loaded, the debugger itself is reset and the project file is loaded (when the target device differs from the target device specified when the debugger was started, the target device becomes the target device specified in the project file). (1/2) Window Configuration dialog box Main window Set Data All items (target device, clock source selection, pin mask setting, mapping information) Display position, toolbar/status bar/button display information, execution mode information, trace On/Off information, coverage On/Off information File information to be downloaded Setting information Setting information Display information of window, font information Display information of window, display start address Display information of window, display start address Display information of window Display information of window Display information of window Display information of window Display information of window, event information Download dialog box Extended Option dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Source window Assemble window Memory window Stack window SFR window Local Variable window Trace View window Event dialog box User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 113 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2/2) Window Event Link dialog box Break dialog box Trace dialog box Snap Shot dialog box Timer dialog box Event Manager Register window Watch window Coverage window DMM dialog box Set Data Display information of window, link event information Display information of window, break event information Display information of window, trace event information Display information of window, snap event information Display information of window, timer event information Display information of window, event information Display information of window Display information of window, watch entry information Display information of window Setting information Caution The substance of the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS project is stored in the XXXX.PRI file. When specifying the XXXX.prj file, be sure to place the XXXX.PRI in the same directory. Function buttons Loads the selected file as the project file. Closes the dialog box. Closes this dialog box without loading the project file. Opens the help window. 114 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project File Save Dialog Box General A project file is a file that stores debugging environments. When saving debugging environments in a project file, the size of the window and the position of the environments in the window are also saved. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Project] [Save As...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , J , and A keys in that order. If a project file was loaded or saved previously, and to save a file of the same name, do as follows: * In the main window Select [File] [Project] [Save] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , J , and S keys in that order. In this way, a file of the same name as the previously loaded or saved project file can be saved without the Project File Save dialog box being opened. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 115 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-23. Project File Save Dialog Box (1) Save location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area Function Saves a new project file or a project file whose name has been changed. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * Save location select area * File name select area * File kind select area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Save location select area This area selects the drive or directory. (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. (3) File kind select area This area displays the kind of file displayed in the list. Project (*.prj) files are displayed. 116 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Saved contents The items from each window shown in the following table are saved in the project file. Window Configuration dialog box Main window Set Data All items (target device, clock source selection, pin mask setting, mapping information) Display position, toolbar/status bar/button display information, execution mode information, trace On/Off information, coverage On/Off information File information to be downloaded Setting information Setting information Display information of window, font information Display information of window, display start address Display information of window, display start address Display information of window Display information of window Display information of window Display information of window Display information of window, event information Display information of window, link event information Display information of window, break event information Display information of window, trace event information Display information of window, snap event information Display information of window, timer event information Display information of window, event information Display information of window Display information of window, watch entry information Display information of window Setting information Download dialog box Extended Option dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Source window Assemble window Memory window Stack window SFR window Local Variable window Trace View window Event dialog box Event Link dialog box Break dialog box Trace dialog box Snap Shot dialog box Timer dialog box Event Manager Register window Watch window Coverage window DMM dialog box Caution Although XXXX.prj is specified as the project, the substance of the ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS project is stored in the automatically created XXXX.prj file. Use the same XXXX.prj as the Project Manager. Note that project files created using V.1.10 or earlier cannot be used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 117 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Saves the project information in the selected file. After saving, closes the dialog box. Closes this dialog box without saving the project file. Opens the help window. 118 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View File Load Dialog Box General Reads display files, and also reads source files, other text files and event setting files, and opens a window. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Open] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , and O keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + O . * Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-24. View File Load Dialog Box (1) File location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 119 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Reads display files, and also reads source files, other text files and event setting files, and opens a window. Depending on the file loaded, the window opened and the status differ. * Loading of a source file (files in which symbol information has been written) If a Source window exists in the active state, it is opened in the static state. If there is no Source window in the active state, a Source window in the active state is opened. * Display file or some other text file It is opened as a text format file in a Source window in the static state. * Loading of an event setting file The Event Manager is opened and the event setting contents are returned to the previous environment. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * File location select area * File name select area * File kind select area The function of each area is explained below. (1) File location select area This area selects the drive or directory. (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. (3) File kind select area This area displays the kind of files displayed in the list. Note that the kind of the file that used in the prior operation is displayed by default, so specify a suitable file extension in this area. The file kinds are as shown below. 120 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Kind (File Extension) Source (*.c; *.s; *.asm) Text (*.txt) Source Text (*.svw) Assemble (*.dis) Memory (*.mem) Watch (*.wch) Register (*.rgw) SFR (*.sfr) Local Variable (*.loc) Stack Trace (*.sth) Trace (*.tvw) Coverage (*.cov) Event (*.evn) All (*.*) Note Meaning Source file Text file Source window display file Assemble window display file Memory window display file Watch window display file Register window display file SFR window display file Local Variable window display file Stack window display file Trace View window display file Coverage window display file Event setting file All files Note The source file extension (c, s, asm) can be changed in the Debugger Option dialog box. Remark If the conventional Variable window display file is used, it can be used as a Watch window display file by changing the file extension from var to wch. Function buttons Loads the selected file. Closes this dialog box without loading the display file. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 121 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View File Save Dialog Box General Saves the contents of the current window when the dialog box was opened to a display file or event setting file. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following method. * In the main window, make the window to be saved the current window and perform either of the following operations. * Select [File] [Save As...] from the menu bar. * Press the GRPH + F , and A keys in that order. Window Figure 6-25. View File Save Dialog Box (1/3) No range (when saved window is Local Variable window, Stack window, SFR window, Register window, Watch window, or Event Manager) (1) Save location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area 122 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-25. View File Save Dialog Box (2/3) Address range (when saved window is Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window) (4) Save range setting area Frame range (when saved window is Trace View window) (4) Save range setting area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 123 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-25. View File Save Dialog Box (3/3) Line range (when saved window is Source window) (4) Save range setting area Function Saves the contents of the current window in a display file. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * Save location select area * File name select area * File kind select area * Save range setting area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Save location select area This area selects the drive or directory. (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. (3) File kind select area This area displays the kind of file displayed in the list. 124 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The file kinds are as shown below. File Kind (File Extension) Source Text (*.svm) Assemble (*.dis) Memory (*.mem) Watch (*.wch) Register (*.rgw) SFR (*.sfr) Local Variable (*.loc) Stack Trace (*.stk) Trace (*.tvw) Coverage (*.cov) Event (*.evn) Source window Assemble window Memory window Watch window Register window SFR window Local Variable window Stack window Trace View window Coverage window Event Manager Current Window Name (4) Save range setting area This area is displayed only when the current window to be saved is the Assemble window, Memory window, Coverage window, Source window, or Trace View window. All: Screen shot: Specifies that all the area from the first line to the last line be saved. This specifies that the entire visible area from the top line to the bottom line of the screen be saved. However, in cases where there is a mixed display with the Source window, the area saved is the from the source line included in the visible area of the screen. Specify Line (in the case of the Source window), Specify Frame (in the case of the Trace View window), Specify Address (in the case of other windows): Specify the starting line and end line of the area to be saved. When the starting line and end line are omitted, it is regarded as if the first line/last line were specified. Details are as shown below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 125 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) If current window is Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window Specify an address range to be saved. Addresses can also be specified by symbols or expressions. (The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box.) The default radix when numbers are input is hexadecimal. If an area with 256 bytes or more is specified, a dialog box indicating the saving status is displayed. To stop saving midway, click the button in this dialog box. (b) If current window is Trace View window Specify the range of trace frames to be saved. (The specification method is the same as in the case of the Trace Move dialog box.) The default radix when numbers are input is decimal. If a range of more than 100 frames is specified, a dialog box indicating the saving status is displayed. To stop saving midway, click the button in this dialog box. 126 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) If current window is Source window Specify the range by line numbers. The default radix when numbers are input is decimal. When the Source window is in the mixed display mode, the mixed display portion in the specified lines is also saved. If a range of more than 100 lines is specified, a dialog box indicating the saving status is displayed. To stop saving midway, click the button in this dialog box. Function buttons Saves the contents of the current window to the selected file. After that, closes the View File Save dialog box. Closes the View File Save dialog box without saving. Opens the help window. Caution The Stack Trace window cannot save an area other than one currently displayed in the window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 127 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Download Dialog Box General Selects the name and format of a file to be downloaded, and downloads the contents of the target memory or the results of coverage to the in-circuit emulator or target. The files and file formats that can be downloaded are as follows. * NEC load module format (XCOFF (.lnk, .lmf)) * Intel HEX format file (normal or extended) * Motorola HEX format file S type (S0, S2, S3, S7, and S8) * Extended Tektronix HEX format file * Binary data format file * Results of coverage If a file other than an object file in the load module format is loaded, debugging cannot be executed at the source level. Network files must be used after being allocated to network drives. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Download...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , and D keys in that order. * Click the button on the toolbar. 128 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-26. Download Dialog Box (1) File location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area (5) Load condition specification area (6) Reset condition specification area (4) Offset setting area Function The Download dialog box consists of the following areas. * File location select area * File name select area * File kind select area * Offset setting area * Load condition specification area * Reset condition specification area The function of each area is explained below. (1) File location select area This area selects the drive or directory. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 129 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. Multiple files can be specified in this area. When specifying multiple file names, place " (quotation marks) on both sides of each file name. It is also possible to specify multiple file names from the top column of the area while pressing the SHIFT key or the CTRL key. (3) File kind select area This area displays the kind of file displayed in the list. The file kinds are as shown below. File Kind (File Extension) Load Module (*.lnk, *.lmf) Hex Format (*.hex) Binary Data (*.bin) Coverage (*.cvb) UBROF (*.d26) Load module format Hex format (the format is auto-judged) Binary data format Coverage results Load module format output by IAR's compiler Format Remark The Hex format is judged automatically. Note that these are the default file extensions; file extensions other than these can also be used. (4) Offset setting area This area specifies the offset address when loading the hex format, the binary data format, and the coverage results. Address specification can also be made by an expression (except symbols). The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. Offset values are disregarded for load module format files. (5) Load condition specification area This area sets the load conditions. Symbol: Object: Specifies whether the symbol information is read (checked, default) or not. condition is disregarded for files other than those in the load module format. Specifies whether the object information is read (checked, default) or not. Note that this 130 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (6) Reset condition specification area This area sets the reset conditions. Symbol: CPU: Reset the symbol information (always checked). Specifies whether to reset the emulation CPU or not (checked, default). Function buttons Loads the selected file and closes dialog box. Closes this dialog box without loading the file. Opens the help window that explains the Download dialog box. Returns the input data to its original form. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 131 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Upload Dialog Box General Selects the name and format of the file to be saved, and saves the contents of the target memory or results of coverage in this file. The following files and file formats can be saved. * Intel HEX format file (extended only) * Motorola HEX format file S type (S0, S2, and S8 only) * Extended Tektronix HEX format file * Binary data format file * Results of coverage Opening method The dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Upload...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , and U keys in that order. Window Figure 6-27. Upload Dialog Box (1) File location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area (4) Save range setting area 132 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function The Upload dialog box consists of the following areas. * File location select area * File name select area * File kind select area * Save range setting area The function of each area is explained below. (1) File location select area This area selects the drive or directory. (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. (3) File kind select area The file kinds are as shown below. File Kind (File Extension) Intel Hex (*.hex) Motorola Hex (*.hex) Tektro Hex (*.hex) Binary Data (*.bin) Coverage (*.cvb) All (*.*) Intel extended hex format Motorola hex format Extended Tektronics hex format Binary data format Coverage results All files Format These are the default file extensions; file extensions other than these can also be used. The data format is decided by the file extension in which it is saved. However, if "All (*.*)" is selected, the file is saved in the default Intel extended hex format. (4) Save range setting area This area specifies the address range which is to be saved. It is possible to specify the address by symbols or by an expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when numbers are input is hexadecimal. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 133 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Saves the specified address range in the selected file and closes the dialog box. Closes this dialog box without saving the file. Opens the help window that explains the Upload dialog box. Returns the input data to its original form. 134 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Browse Dialog Box General Selects the file set in the Debugger Option dialog box or Source Search dialog box. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * Click the * Click the * Click the button in the Debugger Option dialog box. button in the Source Search dialog box. button in the Source Move dialog box. Window Figure 6-28. Browse Dialog Box (1) File location select area (2) File name select area (3) File kind select area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 135 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function The Browse dialog box consists of the following areas. * File location select area * File name select area * File kind select area The function of each area is explained below. (1) File location select area This area selects the drive or directory. (2) File name select area This area specifies the file name. The file name can be input from the keyboard or it can be selected from the list in the top column of the area. (3) File kind select area This area displays the kinds of files in the list. The file kinds are as shown below. File Kind (File Extension) Source (*.c;, *.s; *.asm) Text (*.txt) All (*.*) Format Source file (The file extension is specified in the Debugger Option dialog box) Text file All files Remark The source (c, s, asm) file extension can be changed in the Debugger Option dialog box. Function buttons Sets the selected file and closes the dialog box. Closes this dialog box without setting the file. Opens the Help window that explains the Browse dialog box. 136 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Move Dialog Box General Specifies the file displayed in the Source window and specifies the display start position. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * When the Source window is active Select [View] [Move...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + J . Window Figure 6-29. Source Move Dialog Box (1) Input mode select area (2) File/address specification area Function This dialog box is displayed when [View] [Move...] is selected while the Source window is open and can be used to change the file's display start position (a new window does not open). The Source Move dialog box consists of the following areas. * Input mode select area * File/address specification area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 137 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Input mode select area This area selects the input mode in cases where the movement destination is specified. { Address/Symbol: { Line/File: Specifies the movement destination by an address (or a symbol). Specifies the movement destination by a line No. (or file name). (2) File/address specification area This area specifies the display file name or display address. With the default, the string selected in the accessed window, or when there is no selected string, the first character string in the input history, is displayed, but as necessary, it can be changed by inputting from the keyboard. The following two specification methods are used. * Display address specification * Display file name specification By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. (a) Display address specification Specify the address where the display starts. It is possible to specify the address by symbols or by an expression. The specification method is the same as in the Address Move dialog box. When "Address/Symbol" is selected, the default radix when inputting numerical values becomes hexadecimal. The source text is displayed so that the source line corresponding to the specified address value can be seen. (b) Display file name specification Specify the name of the file to be displayed in the Source window. For the file name, it is possible to specify the file name only and to specify the absolute path or the relative path. If the file name only, or the relative path, is specified, search is made for the file in each of the following directories in the order shown. The first file to be found as a result of the search is displayed. * The directory which is the source path specified in the Debugger Option dialog box. The line number can also be specified other than the file name. The file's line number is specified as follows. 138 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * < Function buttons Opens the Browse dialog box. Displays the source text from the specified position. Closes this dialog box. Returns the input data to its original form. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 139 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Address Move Dialog Box General Specifies a display start address in the Memory window, Assemble window, or Coverage window. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. (1) When Assemble window is displayed * In the main window Select [View] [Move...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + J . (2) When Memory window is displayed * In the main window Select [View] [Move...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + J . (3) When Coverage window is displayed * In the main window Select [View] [Move...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + J . Window Figure 6-30. Address Move Dialog Box (1/2) Address Move dialog box of Assemble window 140 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-30. Address Move Dialog Box (2/2) Address Move dialog box of Memory window Address Move dialog box of Coverage window Function The Address Move dialog box consists of the following area. * Address specification area The function of this area is explained below. (1) Address specification area This area specifies an address. The default address is the string selected in the called window, or the value of the current PC. This value can be changed by keyboard input as necessary. An address can also be specified by a symbol or an expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Symbol To Address dialog box, but the default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 141 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Displays the Memory window, Assemble window, or Coverage window from the specified address. Closes this dialog box. Returns the input data to its original form. Opens the help window. 142 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Move Dialog Box Outline Specifies the display start position in the Trace View window. Opening Method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * When the Trace View window is active, Select [View] [Move...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and V keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + J . Window Figure 6-31. Trace Move Dialog Box (1) Frame select area (2) Frame No. specification area Function This dialog box is displayed by selecting [View] [Move...] when the Trace View window is open, and can be used to change the trace results display starting position. The Trace Move dialog box consists of the following areas. * Frame select area * Frame No. specification area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 143 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Frame select area This area selects the frame that is the move destination. Selected Item 1st frame of last block Trigger frame of last block Last frame of last block Frame No. Description Move to the first frame of the latest block frame in the trace data. Move to the latest trigger frame of the latest block frame in the trace data. Move to the last frame in the trace data. Move to the frame with the specified No. When 0 is specified, move to the first frame in the trace data. When this item is checked, shift the focus to the area specified by the frame No. (2) Frame No. specification area If "Frame No." is selected in the frame selection area, this area specifies the frame No. In the default, the string selected in the accessed window, or "Last" is displayed, but as necessary, it can be changed by inputting from the keyboard. The default radix when inputting numerical values is decimal. When a "+" mark is input in front of a numerical value, the area moves forward the specified number of frames (toward the end of the display) from the frame at the cursor position. Conversely, when a "-" mark is input in front of the numerical value, the area moves backward the specified number of frames (toward the beginning of the display). The frame No. specification can also be specified in the following format. It is also possible to specify it in abbreviated form. The input characters are not case sensitive. The contents are shown below. Specification First Trigger Last Top Bottom Abbreviated Form S T L O B Description Move to the first frame of the current trace block. Move to the trigger frame of the current trace block. Move to the last frame of the current trace block. Move to the first frame of the trace data. Move to the last frame of the trace data. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. 144 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Performs trace display from the specified position. Closes the Trace Move dialog box. Returns the input data to its original form. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 145 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Symbol To Address Dialog Box General Displays the address of a specified variable or function, and the value of a symbol. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. Select [View] [Symbol...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and Y keys in that order. Window Figure 6-32. Symbol To Address Dialog Box (1) Symbol specification area (2) Conversion results display area (3) Display radix specification area Function The Symbol To Address dialog box consists of the following areas. * Symbol specification area * Conversion results display area * Display radix specification area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Symbol specification area 146 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area specifies the variable, function name, symbol name, or line number to be converted. Other than this, an I/O port name, SFR name, register name, PSW flag name, or an expression can be specified. The I/O port name and SFR name are displayed by address values, the register name is displayed by the register contents and the PSW flag name is displayed by the flag value. Also, bit symbols are converted to "Address.bit". Furthermore, an expression which includes a bit symbol cannot be written. Specification methods are shown below. Conversion Object Variable Specification Method var file#var (If a static function with a file name attached is specified.) func#var (If a static function with a function name attached is specified.) file#func#var (If a static function with a file name and function name attached is specified.) func file#func (If a static function with a file name attached is specified.) label file#label (If a local label with a file name attached is specified.) equsym file#equsym (If a local EQU symbol with a file name attached is specified.) bitsym file#bitsym (If a local bit symbol with a file name attached is specified.) file#no portname sfrname regname pswname Function Label EQU symbol Bit symbol Line number of source file I/O Port SFR Register PSW Flag Remark var: Variable name, func: Function, file: File name, label: Label name, equsym: EQU symbol name, bitsym: Bit symbol name, portname: I/O port name, sfrname: SFR name, regname: Register name, pswname: PSW flag name, no: Source file line number. A "#" (sharp) is used as the delimiter between the file name and the variable, function name, and line No. If the specified symbol could not be found inside the scope, all symbols are searched for (static variable, static function, local label, local EQU symbol, and local bit symbol). As the default, the symbol name has priority. Furthermore, when desiring to change the priority order temporarily, adding a "$" (Dollar) sign in front of the symbol causes the register name to have priority. If reading multiple load modules, when specifying the load module names, use the delimitor "$" between the load module name and the file name, variables, function name, and symbol name. In the default, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it is possible to change it by inputting from the keyboard. The radix of the default when inputting numerical values is decimal. When changing the contents of the symbol specification area, clicking the displays the conversion results in the conversion results display area. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. button User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 147 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Conversion results display area The variables specified in the symbol specification area, the function address, symbol values, line number addresses and expression values, etc. are displayed in this area. (3) Display radix specification area This area specifies the display radix of the conversion results display area. Displayed in hexadecimal (default). Displayed in decimal. Displayed in octal. Displayed in binary. Function buttons When the contents of the symbol specification area have been changed, the symbols are converted. When the contents of the symbol specification area are unchanged after conversion, the dialog box closes. Closes the Symbol To Address dialog box. Returns the input data to the original values. If the the data returns to the state it was in just after the button has already been clicked, button was clicked. Opens the help window. 148 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Window General This window displays the source file or text file. Also, display of disassembly of a program mixed with a source file, and execution of online assembly on a mixed display is possible. There are two modes in the Source window, normal display mode and mixed display mode. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [SourceText] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and S keys in that order. * Click the button on the toolbar. button. * In the View File Load dialog box, select source file or text file, then click the Window Figure 6-33. Source Window (1/2) Normal Display Mode User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 149 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-33. Source Window (2/2) Mixed Display Mode There are two modes in the Source window, normal display mode and mixed display mode. An explanation of each of these modes is given below. Refer to (4) Source text display area for further details. (a) Normal display mode In the normal display mode, general text files as well as source files can be displayed. (b) Mixed display mode In the mixed display mode, disassembly of programs combined with source files is displayed. Online assembly cannot be performed in the Source window. Perform online assembly in the Assemble window. The display contents in the mixed display mode can be saved as a display file. Also, in a Source window that displays the source file from which the symbol information is read, there are two states, the active state and the static state. Source windows in the active state can only be opened one at a time, whereas multiple windows can be opened at the same time in the static state. Switching between states is done via the [Window] menu. When switching the state of a window from static to active, the window which was active is switched to static. After being switched to static, the window is displayed with a new number such as Source[2]. Source files in which symbol information has not been read are read as text format files and their contents are not changed. These two states are described below. 150 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) Active state A Source window in the active state is synchronized with the current PC value and the Source window's display is updated continuously so that it is always displaying the current PC line. Also, if a Source window in the active state is synchronized not only with the jump function's jump destination but also with the Trace View window, the display in the Source window is updated in synch with the Trace View window. The first Source window opened is in the active state. (b) Static State A Source window in the static state is not synchronized with the current PC value and does not change the display position, but its contents are updated. Also, a Source window in the static state does not become a jump destination and is not synchronized with the Trace View window. If an active Source window is already open, a new Source window is opened in the static state. Function This window displays source files or text files. It also displays disassembled display of programs mixed with source files and can also perform online assembly in a mixed display. The tab size and display font can be specified in the Debugger Option dialog box. The Source window consists of the following areas. * Point mark area * Current PC mark area * Line number/address display area * Source text display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Point mark area This area sets or deletes breakpoints, and displays the set status of each event condition and whether the program code exists or not. (a) Breakpoint setting/deletion function By clicking this area with the mouse, a breakpoint can be set or deleted. The necessary mouse operations are as follows depending on the line where mouse is clicked. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 151 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Line Where blank or marks other than the "B" mark are displayed (E, L, T mark etc.) Where "B" mark (blue) is displayed (software breakpoint) Where "B" mark (red, black) is displayed (hardware breakpoint) Setting of "On Mouse Click" in Extended Option Dialog Box Soft Break Hard Break Soft Break Hard Break Soft Break Hard Break Operation Sets software breakpoint Sets hardware breakpoint Deletes software breakpoint Sets hardware breakpoint Sets software breakpoint Deletes hardware breakpoint Setting and deletion of breakpoints can be performed for lines which have an "*" displayed in the point mark area. As for lines without an "*" displayed, setting or deletion can be done on either the line above or below the line where an "*" is displayed. If a breakpoint is set, the "B" mark is displayed in the point mark area. However, if a mark other than the "B" mark is displayed, the "A" mark is displayed. The "A" mark shows that multiple events are set. When a hardware breakpoint and a software breakpoint overlap, the "A" mark is displayed. If a breakpoint is deleted, the "B" mark in the point mark area is deleted and the area is left blank or a mark other than the "B" mark is displayed. The "B" mark is displayed in the following colors in accordance with the type of breakpoint and its state. Display Color Blue Red Black Explanation Shows that a software breakpoint is set. Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is valid. Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is invalid. The hardware breakpoint can be made valid in the Event Manager or the Break dialog box. If a breakpoint is set in the point mark area, it becomes valid as soon as it is set. (b) Event condition display function The set status of each event is displayed. If an execution event or access fetch event is set to the corresponding source line, a mark corresponding to the type of event is displayed. Mark E L B T Ti S A M Note Meaning Shows that an event condition is set Shows that the final stage of an event link is set Shows that a break event is set Shows that a trace event is set Shows that a timer event is set Shows that a snapshot event is set Shows that two or more events are set Shows that a DMM event is set Note ID78K0S-NS only. 152 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If a range address is specified as an event's address condition, the lower address of the range becomes the object. Also, the address condition's mask specification is not reflected. (c) Program code display function Lines where an "*" is displayed in the point mark area show that program code corresponding to the line number exists. Symbol With "*" Explanation Shows that program code corresponding to the source file line No. exists. This is displayed only in cases where the load module is downloaded and symbol information has been read. Shows that program code corresponding to the source file line No. does not exist. Also, if a file other than a source file, such as a text file, is displayed, no lines have "*" displayed. Without "*" (2) Current PC mark display area This area displays the mark ">" indicating the value of the current PC (PC register value). By clicking this mark with the mouse, the PC register value is displayed in the pop-up window. The program is executed up to the specified line by double-clicking on the current PC mark area. (3) Line number/address display area Normal display mode Mixed display mode This area displays the line number of the source file or text file. On lines where program code corresponding to the source file line number exists, the line number is displayed in red characters and on lines where no program code exists, the line number characters are displayed in black. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 153 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Also, the disassemble display's address is displayed in the mixed display mode. Address characters are dimmed. The position of the line number/address display area can be selected as desired by clicking the mouse. A selected line number or address is highlighted. The following functions are included in line number or address selection. (a) Drag-and-drop function The selected highlighted line number or address can be dragged to another window or area. If the line number or address position selected in the line number/address display area is dragged using the left button of the mouse, the mouse cursor's shape changes from an arrow to a . If the cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the mouse cursor changes form to . The operation is executed for the address determined from the dropped address or line number in the window where it was dropped. The operation after drag-and-drop differs depending on the window or area where the items were dropped. Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object * Event Manager Event manager area in each of the setting dialog boxes below * Event dialog box * Event Link dialog box * Break dialog box * Trace dialog box * Snap Shot dialog box * Timer dialog box * Link condition setting area in the Event Link dialog box * Break condition setting area in the Break dialog box * Section trace start condition area, section trace end condition area, and qualify trace condition area in the Trace dialog box * Snapshot condition setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box * Timer condition setting area in the Timer dialog box * Address condition setting area and data condition setting area in the Event dialog box * Memory snap data setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box Operation After Drop With the dropped line number or address as the address condition, the execution event conditions are generated automatically. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not specified. Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value for the symbol which is the closest. With the dropped line number or address as the address condition, the execution event conditions are generated automatically. Furthermore, automatically generated event conditions are set in the condition setting area where they were dropped. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not specified. Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value for the symbol which is the closest. The line numbers or the address texts are set in the area where they were dropped. Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value for the symbol which is the closest. 154 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b) Window link function Uses a line number or address to show the linked relationship between the Trace View window and the Source window. The line number or address which is the link object with the Trace View window is highlighted. For details, refer to the window link function under Trace View window. (4) Source text display area This area performs display and disassembly display of source files and text files and online assembly. The display contents of the source text display area can be scrolled using the vertical and horizontal scroll bars. By selecting [View] [Mix] on the menu bar, the normal display mode and the mixed display mode can be switched. Example 1. Normal display mode The normal display mode is the mode in which the contents of source files or text files are viewed. 2. Mixed display mode The mixed display mode is the mode where disassembly display in combination with source file display is performed. * If a line of the displayed source file corresponds to program code, the disassemble line is displayed following that source line. In the disassemble line, the address label, code data, and disassembled mnemonic are displayed. * The mnemonic's display starting position is adjusted according to the tab size setting value. * The mixed display mode is valid only in cases where a load module is downloaded and symbol information is read into it, and a source file corresponding to the downloaded load module is displayed. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 155 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * Even if [View] [Mix] on the menu bar is checked and mixed display mode is selected, in cases where a source file other than one corresponding to a load module is displayed, the display mode is the normal display mode. * The disassemble display in the mnemonic column displayed in the mixed display mode can be changed. In the case of a change, move the cursor to the mnemonic column of the disassemble display line and change it. The overwrite mode and the insert mode can be switched during editing using the INS key. If the cursor is moved to a different line after making changes in the mnemonic column, the change contents are checked. If the change contents are incorrect, the code data in the line where the change was made becomes an "*". Even if moved to a different line, the change contents are not written to memory. A different line can be changed with the change contents not written to memory. The changed contents of the mnemonic column are written to memory using the Enter key. The change contents are also checked if the Enter key is pressed. If the change contents are incorrect, the code data in the incorrect line become an "*". If there is even one incorrect line, the change contents are not written to memory. In such a case, correct the change contents. To discard the change contents, press the ESC key. If there are no errors in the change contents, press the Enter key. After the change contents are written to memory, the cursor moves to the next line's mnemonic column. The next line can then be changed. The current PC line and the breakpoint setting line are displayed with different display colors and in bold characters. Meaning of Line Current PC line Display Color Yellow Explanation This is the source line or the disassemble display line corresponding to the current PC value. It is the line where a ">" is displayed in the current PC mark area. When there is a mixed display, the display color of the disassemble display line only is changed. The source line is displayed with the normal display color. This is a source line or a disassemble display line where a valid breakpoint is set. It is the line where a red or blue "B" is displayed in the point mark area. When there is a mixed display, the display color of the disassemble display line only is changed. The source line is displayed with the normal display color. Breakpoint setting line Red The source text display area has a number of functions, including program execution with the line where the cursor is positioned as the object and setting of the breakpoint. * Start function * Come function * Breakpoint setting function * Program counter setting function * Jump function 156 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE With these functions, if there is a cursor located on the source text line, the top address of the program code corresponding to the source line becomes the object and if the cursor is located on the disassemble display line, that address becomes the object. Also, if no program code exists on the source line, the top address of either the line above or the line below that line, where program code exists, becomes the object. Furthermore, these functions cannot be executed in the following cases. The corresponding menu becomes unavailable (dimmed). * In the case where a file other than a source file is being displayed. * In the case where a user program is being executed. Each function is explained below. (a) Start function Executes the user program from the line where the cursor is placed. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line where execution is to start. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Start From Here] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and A keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys SHIFT + f*6 . (b) Come function Executes the user program up to the line where a cursor is placed. While the user program is being executed by this function, however, the currently set break event is not generated. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line at which a break is to occur. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Come Here] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and M keys in that order. Press the shortcut key f*6 . (c) Breakpoint setting function Sets a breakpoint to the line where a cursor is placed. An execution event is used as the breakpoint to be set. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line on which a breakpoint is to be set. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Break Point] or [Software Break Point] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and B keys or GRPH + R , and F keys in that order. Press shortcut key f*9 or f*11 . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 157 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (d) Program counter setting function Sets the address of the line where a cursor is placed to the program counter (PC). This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line where the program counter (PC) is to be set. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Change PC] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and H keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + f*9 . (e) Jump function Jumps to the Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window by using the address of the line where a cursor is placed as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line that is the jump origin. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. * If the jump destination is the Assemble window Select [Jump] [Assemble] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination is the Memory window Select [Jump] [Memory...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + M . * If the jump destination is the Coverage window Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + I . The text displayed in the source text display area can be selected by the following methods. * From the desired position in the displayed text, drag the text to the desired position within the range of one line. Select the text from the drag start position to the end position. * Double-click on the character string. The words in the double-clicked position are selected. In the source text display area, there are a number of functions which can be performed with the selected text as the object, such as watch and quick watch. 158 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (f) Watch function Adds the selected variables, etc. to the Watch window and displays their contents. This function can be run by performing the following operations in order. <1> Select the text. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [View] [View Watch] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order. button in the Source window. Click the If the assembler symbol was selected, add it to the Watch window in accordance with the settings in the Debugger Option dialog box. Apart from the above method, this function can also be run by performing the following operation. <1> Select the text. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [View] [Add Watch...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and W keys in that order. By performing the above operation, the Add Watch dialog box is opened and the selected text is added to the Watch window. Furthermore, if the Watch window has not yet been opened, it will be opened. (g) Quick watch function This displays the contents of the selected variables, etc. temporarily in the Quick Watch dialog box. This function is run by performing the following operations in order. <1> Select the text. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [View] [Quick Watch...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and Q keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W . button in the Source window. Click the The Quick Watch dialog box will open and the contents will be displayed. (h) Drag-and-drop function Through a drag-and-drop operation, the selected text can be dragged to another window or area and dropped. The operation order is shown below. <1> Drag the selected text using the left button of the mouse. The mouse cursor's shape will change from an arrow to a . <2> If the mouse cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the cursor changes form to . Operation after drag-and-drop differs depending on the window or area where the items were dropped. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 159 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object * Event Manager Event manager area in each of the setting dialog boxes below * Event dialog box * Event Link dialog box * Break dialog box * Trace dialog box * Snap Shot dialog box * Timer dialog box Operation After Drop If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol, with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are generated automatically. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not specified. The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows. Symbol Variable Function Symbols in the data section Symbols in the code section Other Status R/W Execution R/W Execution R/W * Link condition setting area in the Event Link dialog box * Break condition setting area in the Break dialog box * Section trace start condition area, section trace end condition area, and qualify trace condition area in the Trace dialog box * Snapshot condition setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box * Timer condition setting area in the Timer dialog box If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol, with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are generated automatically. Furthermore, the automatically generated event conditions are set in each dropped conditions setting area. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not specified. The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows. Symbol Variable Function Symbols in the data section Symbols in the code section Other Text is set in the dropped area. Status R/W Execution R/W Execution R/W * Address condition setting area and data condition setting area in the Event dialog box * Memory snap data setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box Watch window If the dropped text can be recognized as a symbol, the symbol contents are displayed. 160 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Opens the Source Search dialog box and searches for source text character strings. If text is selected in the source text display area, the selected text is set as the search object and the Source Search dialog box is opened. If text has not been selected, the Source Search dialog box is opened with the search object in the blank state. The search method is specified in the Source Search dialog box. The search results are displayed as selected in the Source window. Performs the same operation as [View] [Search] on the menu bar. Searches for the text that matches the search conditions set in the Source Search dialog box in the backward direction from the cursor position (toward the top of the display). button during a search. It changes to a Searches for the text that matches the search conditions set in the Source Search dialog box in the forward direction from the cursor position (toward the bottom of the display). button during a search. It changes to a Interrupts a search. During a search, the button or the button changes to a button. Adds variables and other items selected in the source text display area to the Watch window. If the Watch window is currently not open, this button opens it. If text is not selected in the source text display area, the Watch window is only opened. This button operates the same as [View] [View Watch]. Displays the selected variables and other contents of the source text display area temporarily in the Quick Watch dialog box. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box. If text is not selected in the source text display area, the Quick Watch dialog box is only opened. This button operates the same as [View] [Quick Watch]. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window. Caution If program code is described in an include file and if multiple files are included, the 1 to 1 relationship between line numbers and addresses disappears. In such include files, the function which uses the relationship between the line number and the address does not function normally. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 161 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Search Dialog Box General Searches file contents. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * When the Source window is active Select [View] [Search...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G . Click the button. Window Figure 6-34. Source Search Dialog Box (1) Search data specification area (2) Search condition specification area (4) Search file specification area (3) Search direction specification area Function The Source Search dialog box consists of the following areas. * Search data specification area * Search condition specification area * Search direction specification area * Search file specification area The function of each area is explained below. 162 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Search data specification area This area specifies the data to be searched. Although the character string selected in the window that has called this dialog box is displayed as the default assumption, the character string can be changed by keyboard input as necessary. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. (2) Search condition specification area This area specifies via a check box whether the data specified for searching is case sensitive or not. As the default, the data is case sensitive. Not case sensitive Case sensitive (default) (3) Search direction specification area This area specifies the search direction. Two directions, upward and downward, can be selected. * Up: * Down: Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end (upward on display). Downward search. (downward on display). (4) Search file specification area This area specifies the search file. If the specification is omitted, a search is made within the accessed window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 163 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Searches the specified data under given conditions. If a matching character string is found as a result of the search, it is highlighted. To continue searching data, click this button again. Sets the specified conditions as search conditions and closes the dialog box. Stops searching the data. The button changes to the button while data is being searched. Closes the Source Search dialog box. This button changes to the button while data is being searched. Opens the help window that explains the Source Search dialog box. Opens the Browse dialog box. 164 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Window General This window displays a disassemble text and can also execute online assemble. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Assemble...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and A keys in that order. * Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-35. Assemble Window Function Performs disassemble display and online assembly. Online assembly is performed by moving the cursor to the mnemonic. The online assembly results are also reflected in the Memory window. The Assemble window has two states, the active state and the static state. Only one Assemble window in the active state can be opened at a time, but multiple Assemble windows which are in the static state can be opened at the same time. These two states are described below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 165 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Active state The first Assemble window that is opened is in the active state. The Assemble window's display is updated when it is in the active state so that the current PC line is displayed at all times in sync with the current PC value. Also, when in the active state, the Assemble window becomes the jump destination for the jump function and, if it is synchronized with the Trace View window, the Assemble window's display is updated in sync with the Trace View window. (2) Static state An Assemble window in the static state is not synchronized with the current PC value and it displays a constant address. Also, an Assemble window in the static state cannot be made a jump destination, nor can it be synchronized with the Trace View window. If an Assemble window has already been opened in the active state, then all subsequent windows are opened in the static state. The Assemble window consists of the following areas. * Point mark display area * Current PC mark display area * Address display area * Disassemble display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Point mark display area This area sets or deletes breakpoints, and displays the setting status of each event. (a) Breakpoint setting/deletion function By clicking this area with the mouse, breakpoints can be set or deleted. The operation when clicking the mouse is as follows depending on the line where the mouse is clicked and the setting of On Mouse Click in the Extended Option dialog box. Line Where blank or marks other than the "B" mark are displayed (E, L, T mark etc.) Where "B" mark (blue) is displayed (software breakpoint) Where "B" mark (red, black) is displayed (hardware breakpoint) Setting of "On Mouse Click" in Extended Option Dialog Box Soft Break Hard Break Soft Break Hard Break Soft Break Hard Break Operation Sets software breakpoint Sets hardware breakpoint Deletes software breakpoint Sets hardware breakpoint Sets software breakpoint Deletes hardware breakpoint 166 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If a breakpoint is set, the "B" mark is displayed in the point mark area. However, if a mark other than the "B" mark is displayed, the "A" mark is displayed. The "A" mark shows that multiple events are set. When a hardware breakpoint and a software breakpoint overlap, the "A" mark is displayed. If a breakpoint is deleted, the "B" mark in the point mark area is deleted and the area is left blank or a mark other than the "B" mark is displayed. The "B" mark is displayed in the following colors in accordance with the type of breakpoint and its state. Display Color Blue Red Black Explanation Shows that a software breakpoint is set. Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is valid. Shows that the set hardware breakpoint is invalid. The hardware breakpoint can be made valid in the Event Manager or the Break dialog box. If a breakpoint is set in the point mark area, it becomes valid at the time it is set. (b) Event condition display function The set status of each event is displayed. If the execution event, or the fetch condition of an access event is set, a mark indicating the type of each event condition is displayed in the corresponding assemble line. Mark E L B T Ti S A M Note Meaning Shows that an event condition is set Shows that the final stage of an event link is set Shows that a break event is set Shows that a trace event is set Shows that a timer event is set Shows that a snapshot event is set Shows that two or more events are set Shows that a DMM event is set Note ID78K0S-NS only. If a range address is specified as an event's address condition, the lower address of the range becomes the object. Also, the address condition's mask specification is not reflected. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 167 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Current PC mark display area This area displays mark ">" indicating the value of the current PC (PC register value). The program is executed up to the specified line by double-clicking the current PC mark area. (3) Address display area This area displays the disassemble start address. When this field is clicked, an address is highlighted and selected. In addition, this area has the following functions. (a) Drag-and-drop function A selected address which is highlighted can be dragged to another window or area. If the mouse cursor is positioned on the position of the selected address in the address display area and the left button is pressed and held down, then when the mouse is dragged, the arrow cursor form changes to a . If the mouse cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the cursor changes form to . The operation is performed with respect to the dropped address in the window where it was dropped. Operations after an address is dropped depend on the respective window or area where it was dropped. 168 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object * Event manager Event manager area in each of the setting dialog boxes below * Event dialog box * Event Link dialog box * Break dialog box * Trace dialog box * Snap Shot dialog box * Timer dialog box * Link condition setting area in the Event Link dialog box * Break condition setting area in the Break dialog box * Section trace start condition area, section trace end condition area, and qualify trace condition area in the Trace dialog box * Snapshot condition setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box * Timer condition setting area in the Timer dialog box * Address condition setting area and data condition setting area in the Event dialog box * Memory snap data setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box Operation After Drop With the dropped address as the address condition, the execution event conditions are generated automatically. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not specified. Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value for the symbol which is the closest. The execution event conditions are generated automatically with the dropped address as the address condition. Furthermore, automatically generated event conditions are set in the conditions setting area where they were dropped. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The external sense data conditions are not specified. Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value for the symbol which is the closest. The address text is set in the area where it was dropped. Address conditions are set in the form of symbol name + offset value for the symbol which is the closest. (b) Window link function Uses an address to show the linked relationship between the Trace View window and the disassemble display. The address which is the link object with the Trace View window is highlighted. For details, refer to the window link function of the Trace View window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 169 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Disassemble display area The address label, code data, and disassembled mnemonic are displayed in the disassemble display area. The disassemble display in the mnemonic column can be changed. To change it, move the cursor to the mnemonic column. During editing, the INS key can be used to switch between the overwrite mode and the insert mode. After making the desired changes in the mnemonic column, if the cursor is moved to a different line, the contents of the change are checked. If the change contents are incorrect, the code data in the changed line becomes an "*". Even if it is moved to a different line, the change contents are not written to memory. Another line can be changed without the changes being written to memory. The changed contents in the mnemonic column are written to memory by pressing the Enter key. The change contents are also checked when the Enter key is pressed. If the change contents are incorrect, the code data in the incorrect line become an "*". If even one line is incorrect, the change contents are not written to memory. In such a case, correct the change contents. To discard the change contents, press the ESC key. If the change contents are not incorrect, if the Enter key is pressed, after the change contents are written to memory, the cursor moves to the next line's mnemonic column. In this way changes can continue to be made in the next line. If, as a result of the change, the number of bytes in the instructions after the change is fewer than the number of bytes in the instruction before the change, the remaining bytes are replaced by the "NOP" instruction. Also, if, as a result of the change, the number of bytes in the instructions after the change is greater than the number of bytes in the instruction before the change, the next instruction is overwritten. In this case also, the remaining bytes are replaced by the "NOP" instruction. Even in cases where the change runs into the source line, it is overwritten in the same way. As for the current PC line and the breakpoint setting line, the display color is changed and they are displayed in bold. 170 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Meaning of Line Current PC line Display Color Yellow Explanation This line corresponds to the current PC value. This is the line where a ">" is displayed in the current PC mark area. This is the line where the valid breakpoint is set. This is the line where a red or blue "B" is displayed in the point mark area. Breakpoint setting line Red The disassemble display area includes a number of functions such as program execution with the line where the cursor is located as the object, or setting of the breakpoint, etc. * Start function * Come function * Breakpoint setting function * Program counter setting function * Jump function Furthermore, in the following case, these functions cannot be executed. The corresponding menu is dimmed and becomes impossible to select. * If a user program is being executed. Each function is explained below. (a) Start function Executes the user program from the line where the cursor is located. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line where execution is to start. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Start From Here] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and A keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys SHIFT + f*6 . (b) Come function Executes the user program up to the line where a cursor is placed. While the user program is being executed in this mode, however, the break event currently set is not generated. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line where execution is to end. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Come Here] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and M keys in that order. Press the shortcut key f*6 . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 171 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Breakpoint setting function Sets a breakpoint to the line where a cursor is placed. An execution event is used as the breakpoint to be set. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line to which a breakpoint is to be set. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Break Point] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and B keys in that order. Press shortcut key f*9 . (d) Program counter setting function Sets the address of the line where the cursor is placed to the PC (program counter). <1> Move the cursor to the line where the program counter is to be set (PC). <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Run] [Change PC] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + R , and H keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + f*9 . (e) Jump function Jumps to the Source window, Memory window, or Coverage window by using the address of the line where the cursor is placed as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line which is the jump origin. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. * If the jump destination is the Source window Select [Jump] [SourceText] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination is the Memory window Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + M . * If the jump destination is the Coverage window Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I . 172 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The text displayed in the disassemble display area can be selected by the following method. * From the position where the desired text starts in the display, drag the mouse to the position within the range of 1 line. The text from the starting position to the end position is the text that is selected. * Double-click the character string. The words in the double-clicked position are selected. In the disassemble display area, a number of functions, such as watch and quick watch with the selected text as the object, can be performed. (f) Watch function This adds the selected data to the Watch window and displays its contents. Furthermore, if an assembler symbol is selected, it is added to the Watch window in accordance with the settings in the Debugger Option dialog box. This function is executed by carrying out the following operations in order. <1> Select the text. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [View] [View Watch] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order. Select [View] [Add Watch...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and W keys in that order. Click the button in the Assemble window. If any of these operations is carried out, the Add Watch dialog box opens and adding is performed. If the Watch window is not currently open, the Watch window is opened. (g) Quick watch function This temporarily displays the contents of the selected data in the Quick Watch dialog box. This function is executed by carrying out the following procedure in order. <1> Select the text. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [View] [Quick Watch...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and Q keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W . button in the Assemble window. Click the The Quick Watch dialog box opens and its contents are displayed. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 173 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (h) Drag-and-drop function Through a drag-and-drop operation, the selected text can be dragged to another window or area. The operation order is shown below. <1> Drag the selected text using the left button of the mouse. The mouse cursor's shape will change from an arrow to a . <2> If the mouse cursor is moved into a window or area where it is possible to drop it, the shape of the cursor changes form to . Operation after drag-and-drop differs depending on the window or area where the items were dropped. Window or Area Which Is the Drop Object * Event Manager Event manager area in each of the setting dialog boxes below * Event dialog box * Event Link dialog box * Break dialog box * Trace dialog box * Snap Shot dialog box * Timer dialog box Operation After Drop If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol, with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are generated automatically. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not specified. The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows. Symbol Variable Function Symbols in the data section Symbols in the code section Other * Link condition setting area in the Event Link dialog box * Break condition setting area in the Break dialog box * Section trace start condition area, section trace end condition area, and qualify trace condition area in the Trace dialog box * Snapshot condition setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box * Timer condition setting area in the Timer dialog box Status R/W Execution R/W Execution R/W If it is possible to convert the dropped text to an address value as a symbol, with the converted address value as the address condition, the Access status (all-access status) or the Execute status event conditions are generated automatically. Furthermore, the automatically generated event conditions are set in each dropped conditions setting area. The event condition names are generated automatically, as Evt00001, Evt00002, ... The data conditions and external sense data conditions are not specified. The dropped text is set in the address conditions. The relationship between the generated event conditions and the symbols is as follows. Symbol Variable Function Symbols in the data section Symbols in the code section Other Text is set in the dropped area. Status R/W Execution R/W Execution R/W * Address condition setting area and data condition setting area in the Event dialog box * Memory snap data setting area in the Snap Shot dialog box Watch window If the dropped text can be recognized as a symbol, the symbol contents are displayed. 174 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Opens the Assemble Search dialog box and searches the character string of a mnemonic. If text has been selected in the disassemble display area, sets the selected text as the search object and opens the Assemble Search dialog box. If text has not been selected, the Assemble Search dialog box will open with the search object in the blank state. Specify the search method in the Assemble Search dialog box. The search results are selectively displayed in the Assemble window. Operation is the same as when [View ] [Search...] is selected on the menu bar. Searches for the contents that match the search conditions set in the Assemble Search dialog box in the backward direction from the cursor position (toward the top of the display). During the search, it changes to a button. Searches for the contents that match the search conditions set in the Assemble Search dialog box in the forward direction from the cursor position (toward the bottom of the display). button. During the search, it changes to a Interrupts the search. During a search, the button or the button changes to the button. Adds the symbol, etc. selected in the disassemble display area to the Watch window. If the Watch window has not been opened, it opens the Watch window. If text has not been selected in the disassemble display area, the Watch window is only opened. The operation is the same as when [View] [View Watch] is selected on the menu bar. Temporarily displays the contents of symbols, etc. selected in the disassemble display area in the Quick Watch dialog box. It opens the Quick Watch dialog box. If text has not been selected in the disassemble display area, the Quick Watch dialog box is only opened. The operation is the same as when [View] [Quick Watch] is selected on the menu bar. Updates the window contents with the latest data. Closes the Assemble window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 175 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Search Dialog Box General Searches the contents of the Assemble window. Opening Method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods when the Assemble window is the current window. * In the main window Select [View] [Search...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G . * In the Assemble window Click the button. Window Figure 6-36. Assemble Search Dialog Box (1) Search data specification area (2) Search conditions specification area (4) Search range specification area (3) Search direction specification area Function Initiates a search for the disassemble contents. Continuous null characters which include input character strings and disassemble character strings are compared as a single null character. The Assemble Search dialog box consists of the following areas. * Search data specification area * Search conditions specification area * Search direction specification area * Search range specification area The function of each area is explained below. 176 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Search data specification area This area specifies the data that is to be searched for. In the default setting, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it can be changed by inputting from the keyboard. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. (2) Search conditions specification area (a) When searching, this check box specifies whether the data specified for searching is case sensitive or not. In the default setting, the data is case sensitive. Not case sensitive. Case sensitive (default) (b) When searching, this check box specifies whether to search the whole range or not. In the default setting, only the remaining portion of the range is searched. Only the remaining portion of the range is searched (default). The whole range is searched. (3) Search direction specification area This specifies the search direction. There are two types of search, upward, and downward. Up: Down: Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end (upward on display). Downward search. (downward on display). User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 177 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Search range specification area This area specifies the addresses being searched. A symbol or an expression can also be specified for an address. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. Function buttons Searches for the specified search data in accordance with the conditions. As the search results, the matching character string is highlighted. For a continuous search, press this button again. Sets the specified conditions as the search conditions and closes the dialog box. Interrupts the search for data. During the data search, the button changes to the button. Closes the Assemble Search dialog box. During a data search, it changes to the button. Opens the help window that explains the Assemble Search dialog box. 178 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Window General This window displays and changes the memory contents. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Memory] from the menu bar. Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and M keys in that order. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 179 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-37. Memory Window Without ASCII display With ASCII display 180 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Displays and changes the memory contents. A vertical scroll bar is always displayed so that the memory contents can be scrolled. The button or the button can also be used to move the display one page up or one page down. Also, even during emulation, the memory contents can be displayed in real time. The real-time display range is the address range set in the Extended Option dialog box. The Memory window has two states, the active state and the static state. Only one Memory window in the active state can be opened at a time, but multiple Memory windows which are in the static state can be opened at the same time. Each Memory window state is explained below. (1) Active state A Memory window in the active state is the jump destination for the jump function and, if it is synchronized with the Trace View window, the Memory window's display is updated in synchronization with the Trace View window. The first Memory window opened is in the active state. (2) Static State A Memory window in the static state is not the jump destination and is not synchronized with the Trace View window. Except for those points, it operates in the same way as in the active state. If an active Memory window is already open, then all subsequent Memory windows are opened in the static state. The Memory window consists of the following areas. * Address display area * Memory display area * ASCII display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Address display area This area displays memory addresses. The address width changes when memory bank is used. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 181 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Memory display area This area displays and changes the memory contents. The contents to be changed are displayed in red characters, then by pressing the Enter key, they are actually written to the target. The contents prior to the change (when in the red character state) can be erased using the ESC key. Up to 256 bytes of data can be changed at one time. This area also has the following two functions in addition to displaying the memory contents making changes. (a) Jump function Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, or Coverage window by using the address at the cursor position as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Move the cursor to the line which is the jump origin. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. * If the jump destination is the Source window Select [Jump] [ SourceText] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination is the Assemble window Select [Jump] [Assemble] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination is the Coverage window Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + I . (b) Window link function Shows the relationship between the Trace View window and the Memory window via memory contents. For further information, refer to the description of the window link function for the Trace View window. 182 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) ASCII display area This area displays the memory contents in ASCII. The memory contents can be converted into ASCII characters for display. The conversion method is the same as the memory display area. The display can be turned on and off by selecting [View] [Ascii] on the menu bar (the display is on by the default setting). This area is also a jump pointer for the jump function, in the same way as in (2) Memory display area. Function buttons Opens the Memory Search dialog box and searches for a character string in the displayed memory contents or memory contents. At this time, the selected data (memory value) is displayed in the Memory Search dialog box as the search subject. If the dialog box is opened without data specified, specify data by key input. The result of the search is highlighted in the Memory window. Searches for the memory contents that match the search conditions set in the Memory Search dialog box in the backward direction from the cursor position (toward the top of the display). It changes to a button during a search. Searches for the memory contents that match the search conditions set in the Memory Search dialog box in the forward direction from the cursor position (toward the bottom of the display). It changes to a button during a search. Interrupts a search. During a search, the button or the button changes to a button. Updates the window's contents with the latest data. Closes this window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 183 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Search Dialog Box General Searches the memory contents. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * Set the Memory window as the current window and in the main window; Select [View] [Search...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G . * In the Memory window button. Click the Window Figure 6-38. Memory Search Dialog Box (1) Search data specification area (2) Search condition specification area (4) Search range specification area (3) Search direction specification area 184 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function This searches the contents of memory for the Memory window where the cursor is placed. If the cursor is in the memory display area, the specified data is regarded as a binary data string and the memory display area is searched. If the cursor is in the ASCII display area, the specified data is regarded as an ASCII character string and the ASCII display area is searched. Unmapped areas, SFR areas, and I/O protected areas are not searched. The search result is highlighted in the Memory window. The highlighted data can be placed on the clipboard, but note that only the last line is placed when the data extends to several lines. The Memory Search dialog box consists of the following areas. * Search data specification area * Search condition specification area * Search direction specification area * Search range specification area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Search data specification area This area specifies the data to be searched. Although the character string selected in the window that has called this dialog box is displayed as the default assumption, the character string can be changed by keyboard input as necessary (input cannot be made using a symbol or expression.) When searching the memory display area, a maximum of 16 items of data can be specified at one time. Specify each item of data using a space as a delimiter. When searching the ASCII display area, a maximum of 256 characters of data can be specified. Spaces in the data are treated as null characters. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. (2) Search condition specification area (a) This area specifies the bit size each specified search data is to be regarded as via a check box. As the default, the data is searched as 8-bit data. Byte: Word: Double Word: Search as 8-bit data (default) Search as 16-bit data Search as 32-bit data User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 185 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b) This is a check box which specifies whether to search the whole specified region or not when conducting search. With the default, only the portion remaining in the range is searched. Searches the remaining portion of the range (default). Searches the whole range. (3) Search direction specification area This area specifies the direction of search. Two directions, upward and downward, can be selected. * Up: * Down: Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end (upward on display). Downward search. (downward on display). (4) Search range specification area This area specifies the addresses being searched. A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. Function buttons Searches for the specified search data in accordance with the conditions. As the search results, the matching character string is highlighted. For a continuous search, press this button again. Sets the specified conditions as the search conditions and closes the dialog box. Interrupts the search for data. During the data search, the Closes the Memory Search dialog box. During a data search, it changes to the button. button changes to the button. Opens the help window that explains the Memory Search dialog box. 186 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Fill Dialog Box General Initializes the memory contents with a specified code. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Edit] [Memory] [Fill...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + E , M , and F keys in that order. Window Figure 6-39. Memory Fill Dialog Box (1) Address range specification area (2) Data specification area Function The Memory Fill dialog box consists of the following areas. * Address range specification area * Data specification area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 187 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Address range specification area This area specifies the address range of the memory contents to be initialized. A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. Specify the initialization top and end addresses, in that order. (2) Data specification area This area specifies the data to be initialized. Binary data strings (byte data strings) with up to 16 items of data can be specified. Specify each item of data using a space as a delimiter. The default radix is hexadecimal and the radix can be specified for each item of data. Function buttons Initializes the memory contents. Closes this dialog box. This button changes to the button during memory initialization. Stops initializing the memory. The button changes to the button during memory initialization. Returns the input data to its original form. Opens the help window. 188 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Copy Dialog Box General Copies the memory contents. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Edit] [Memory] [Copy...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + E , M , and C keys in that order. Window Figure 6-40. Memory Copy Dialog Box (1) Address range specification area Function The Memory Copy dialog box consists of the following area. * Address range specification area The function of this area is explained below. (1) Address range specification area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 189 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area specifies the copy source and copy destination addresses. A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. From: Specifies the address range of the copy source. Specify the copy source top address and copy source end address, in that order. To: Specifies the top address of the copy destination. Function buttons Copies the memory contents. Closes this dialog box. This button changes to the button while copying the memory. Stops copying the memory data. The button changes to the button while copying the memory. Returns the input data to its original value. Opens the help window. 190 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Compare Dialog Box General Compares the memory contents. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Edit] [Memory] [Compare...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + E , M , and P keys in that order. Window Figure 6-41. Memory Compare Dialog Box (1) Compare range specification area Function The Memory Compare dialog box consists of the following area. * Compare range specification area The function of this area is explained below. (1) Compare range specification area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 191 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area specifies the compare source and compare destination addresses. A symbol or expression can also be specified for an address. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. Specify the address range of the compare source and the compare destination so that a guard area is not included. If a guard area is included, an error will occur and the error message f201 (F) will be displayed. Mem1: Mem2: Specify the address range of the compare source. Specify the compare source top address and compare source end address, in that order. Specify the top address of the compare destination. Function buttons Compares the memory contents. If no difference is found as a result of comparison, a confirmation dialog box is displayed. If a difference is found, a Memory Compare Result dialog box is opened. The confirmation dialog box that is displayed if no difference is found as a result of comparison is shown below. By clicking the closed. Closes this dialog box. This button changes to the button in this confirmation dialog box, the Memory Compare dialog box is button during comparison. Stops comparing the memory contents. The button changes to the button while comparing the memory contents. Returns the input data to its original value. Opens the help window. 192 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Compare Result Dialog Box General Displays the result of comparing memory contents. This dialog box is opened if a discrepancy is found as a result of comparing the memory contents in the Memory Compare Dialog box. If no discrepancy is found, a confirmation dialog box is opened instead of this dialog box. Window Figure 6-42. Memory Compare Result Dialog Box Function The Memory Compare Result dialog box consists of the following area. * Compare result display area The function of this area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 193 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Compare result display area This area displays the result of comparing memory contents. Only those parts where there were comparison errors are displayed. Mem1 Addr: Memory: Mem2 Addr: Displays the compare source address at which an error has been found. Displays the data that has caused the error. The compare source data is displayed on the left, and the compare destination data is displayed on the right. Displays the compare destination address at which an error has been found. The address width changes when a memory bank is used. Function buttons Closes this dialog box. Opens the help window. 194 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Watch Window General This window displays and changes the specified data. Opening method This window can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Watch] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and W keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. * In the Source window After selecting data, select [View] [View Watch] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order. button. Click the * In the Assemble window After selecting data, select [View] [View Watch] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and I keys in that order. Click the button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 195 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-43. Watch Window Function Displays and changes data. The data display is added to by selecting a variable name or symbol name in the Source window or the Assemble window and clicking the button, or by dragging the selected part directly to the Watch window with the mouse. Adding can also be done by specifying a variable name or symbol name in the Quick Watch dialog box or the Add Watch dialog box and clicking . To delete a data display, click a variable name or symbol name, then after highlighting it, click the button. Alternatively, make a selection using the arrow keys, then after highlighting the selection delete it by pressing the DEL key. Data value update results and rewrites are reflected in the Memory window. Also, wide-area data allocated to any 2 KB of internal RAM area (such as global variables or public symbols) can be displayed in real time even during emulation, just as in the Memory window. The boundary line between the symbol name display area and data value display/setting area can be moved to the left or right using the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from " The Watch window consists of the following areas. * Symbol name display area * Data value display/setting area " to "". 196 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The function of each area is explained below. (1) Symbol name display area This area displays the variable names and symbol names. A "+" is displayed in front of arrays, pointer type variables, and structures/unions. expanded and displayed as shown below by double-clicking them. * For an array, all the elements of the variable are displayed in accordance with the type of array variable. * For pointer type variables, the data indicated by the pointer is displayed. * For structures/unions, all the members of the structure/union are displayed in accordance with the type of member variable. However, if a structure/union is defined within a structure/union, the members up to the tag name or variable name in the internal structure/union are displayed. For variables which have been expanded and displayed, the "+" display is changed to a "-" display. If they are double-clicked in this state, the expansion display is deleted. Note that variables with a "+" that are displayed inside a structure/union are expanded and displayed in the same way by double-clicking them. To expand and display, or to delete an expansion display, select the variable with the arrow keys, then press the Enter key. Data which has become invalid due to changes in the scope or optimization compilation is dimmed. Whether to display or not display variable types can be set in the Debugger Option dialog box. These variables are User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 197 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Data value display/setting area This area is where data values are displayed and changed. * When the variable is a structure/union, the address is displayed. * When the variable is an enumeration type, the member name is displayed. * When the variable is an integer, it is displayed as follows. XXXH: XXXT: XXXQ: XXXY: [+|-] inf [+|-] nan [+|-] integer portion e [+|-] exponent [+|-] integer portion. Decimal portion [e [+|-] exponent] Values are updated when execution is stopped. To save values, select [File] [Save As...] in the main window, then save to the displayed file. Also, if the acquisition of data values has failed, this area will be blank. Data which has become invalid due to the changing of the scope or optimization compilation is displayed together with a "?". The contents of changes are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key. Displayed in hexadecimal. Displayed in decimal. Displayed in octal. Displayed in binary. * When the variable is a floating point, it is displayed as follows. 198 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If the display size of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the display size cannot be selected. Function buttons Opens the Add Watch dialog box. In the Add Watch dialog box, if the data is specified and the clicked, the specified data is added to the Watch window. Deletes the specified data from the watch window. The DEL key also performs this operation. Moves the selected data one line up. button is Moves the selected data one line down. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes the Watch window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 199 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Watch Dialog Box General Temporarily displays and changes specified data. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [View] [Quick Watch...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and Q keys in that order. * In the Source window button in the Source window. Click the Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W . * In the Assemble window button in the Assemble window. Click the Press the shortcut keys CTRL + W . Window Figure 6-44. Quick Watch Dialog Box (4) Display radix select area (5) Display size select area (1) Symbol specification area (6) Display item number specification area (2) Symbol name display area (3) Data value display/setting area 200 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Temporarily displays and changes specified data. The boundary between the symbol name display area and the data value display/setting area can be moved to the left or right using the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from " "". The Quick Watch dialog box consists of the following areas. * Symbol specification area * Symbol name display area * Data value display/setting area * Display radix select area * Display size select area * Display item number specification area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Symbol specification area " to This area specifies the data to be displayed. In the default setting, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it is also possible to change it by inputting from the keyboard. However, if the selected string does not exist, this area becomes blank. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to button 16 items of input history can be retained. When the contents of the symbol specification area have been changed, clicking the and data value display/setting area. (2) Symbol name display area causes the data specified in the symbol specification area to be displayed in the symbol name display area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 201 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area displays the variable names or symbol names. The display contents are the same as in the Watch window. However, data which has becomes invalid due to changes in the scope or optimization compilation is not displayed. (3) Data value display/setting area This area displays the data values. The display contents and the way to change the contents are the same as in the Watch window. (4) Display radix select area This area selects the radix to be displayed. (5) Display size select area This area selects the size to be displayed. (6) Display item number specification area This area specifies the number of data items to be displayed. Specify blank or a number from 1 to 256. The default is blank. If blank, the data is displayed as a simple variable. If a number 1 or greater is specified, it is displayed as an array variable. In this case, a "+" is displayed in front of the data. By double-clicking this data, all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the data type. "+" of the expanded and displayed data changes to "-". Double-clicking in this state cancels the expanded display. If the display number of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the display number cannot be specified. 202 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Displays the data specified in the symbol specification area in the symbol name display area and the data value display/setting area. Adds the data specified in the symbol specification area to the Watch window. Closes this dialog box. Change contents that have not actually been written to the target are erased. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 203 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Watch Dialog Box General Registers data to be displayed in the Watch window. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods. * In the main window Select [View] [Add Watch...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and W keys in that order. * In the Watch window Click the button in the Watch window. Window Figure 6-45. Add Watch Dialog Box (1) Symbol specification area (2) Display radix select area (3) Display size select area (4) Display item number specification area Functions The Add Watch dialog box consists of the following areas. * Symbol specification area * Display radix select area * Display size select area * Display item number specification area The function of each area is explained below. 204 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Symbol specification area This area specifies the data to be viewed in the Watch window. In the default setting, the string selected in the accessed window is displayed, but as necessary, it is also possible to change it by inputting from the keyboard. However, if the selected string does not exist, this area becomes blank. By clicking the button and displaying the input history, the contents input previously can be reused. Up to 16 items of input history can be retained. The expressions that can be used for inputting data are as shown below. * C language variable name (Variable expression: Variable name) Variable expression [decimal constant values]: Variable expression. *Variable expression: * Register name * SFR name, SFR bit name * Label, EQU and immediate address * Register name.bit * Label name.bit, EQU symbol name.bit, immediate address.bit * Bit symbol (2) Display radix select area Member name: Variable expression Member name: Array elements Structure/union actual member Member of structure/union that indicates a pointer Value of pointer variable This area selects the display radix. The display radix can be selected from among the following. Proper: Hex: Dec: Oct: Bin: String: In the case of a variable, the value specified for each variable is displayed. In the case of a symbol, it is displayed in the radix set in the Debugger Option dialog box. Displayed in hexadecimal (XXXH). Displayed in decimal (XXXT). Displayed in octal (XXXQ). Displayed in binary (XXXY). Displayed as a character string. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 205 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Display size select area This area selects the display size. The display size can be selected from among the following. Adaptive: Byte: Word: Double word: In the case of a variable, the value specified for each variable is displayed. In the case of a symbol, the size set in the Debugger Option dialog box is displayed. Displayed in 8 bits. Displayed in 16 bits. Displayed in 32 bits. If the display size of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the specified size is displayed in the Watch window regardless of the specified display size. (4) Display item number specification area This area specifies the number of data items to be displayed. Specify blank or a number from 1 to 256. The default is blank. If blank, the data is displayed as a simple variable. If a number 1 or greater is specified, it is displayed as an array variable. In this case, a "+" is displayed in front of the data. By double-clicking this data, all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the data type. "+" of the expanded and displayed data changes to "-". Double-clicking in this state cancels the expanded display. If the display number of variables, or assembler bit symbols or registers, etc. in the C language is fixed, the display number cannot be specified. Function buttons Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Does not close the Add Watch dialog box. Adds the specified data to the Watch window and closes the Add Watch dialog box. Closes the Add Watch dialog box. Returns the input data to its original form. Opens the help window. 206 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register Window General This window displays and changes the contents of the registers (general-purpose registers and control registers). Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Register] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and R keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-46. Register Window Function Displays and changes the contents of registers (general-purpose registers and control registers). The register to be displayed can be selected in the Register Select dialog box. The Register window can be opened only in the active state. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 207 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Register window consists of the following areas. * Register bank setting area (ID78K0-NS only) * General-purpose register display area * Control register display area The boundary line between the general-purpose register display area and control register display area can be moved up or down using the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from " " to "". The function of each area is explained below. (1) Register bank setting area This area displays and sets the bank number of the general-purpose registers. Item Register Bank: Description Displays and sets the register bank displayed in the generalpurpose register display area. Changing the bank number is performed using the Current Bank: button. Displays the register bank number currently set to the target (current bank). (2) General-purpose register display area This area displays or changes the contents of the registers with the bank number displayed by Register Bank: in the register bank setting area. The contents can be written to the target memory by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key. This area also functions as a jump pointer for the jump function in addition to displaying/changing generalpurpose registers. Operation of the jump function is the same as in the case of the control registers. General-purpose registers are displayed as absolute names or function names, which can be switched using an item in the View menu displayed or the menu bar. 208 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Control register display area This area displays or changes the contents of the control registers. The contents can be written to the target memory by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key. The flag names and flag values of the register to which "+" is prefixed are displayed by double-clicking the register name. "+" then changes to "-". Switching can also be done by selecting a register name using the arrow keys then pressing the Enter key. In addition, this area also functions as a jump pointer for the jump function. The jump function is a function to jump to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window by using a selected control register value as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Select the control register. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. * If the jump destination window is the Source window. Select [Jump] [Source] from the menu bar. Press GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination window is the Assemble window. Select [Jump] [Assemble] from the menu bar. Press GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination window is the Memory window. Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + M . * If the jump destination window is the Coverage window. Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I . When the memory bank is used, the address width of the PC changes. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 209 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes the Register window. 210 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE SFR Window General This window displays and changes SFRs. The I/O ports set in the Add I/O Port dialog box can also be displayed and changed. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [SFR] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and F keys in that order. Click the button in the tool bar. Window Figure 6-47. SFR Window Function Displays and changes the contents of the SFRs. Note, however, that values cannot be changed for read-only SFRs. Also, SFRs that cause the device to operate when read are read-protected and cannot therefore be read. When reading such SFRs, select the SFR to be read and execute [View] [Compulsion read] from the menu bar. The I/O ports set in the Add I/O Port dialog box can also be displayed and changed. The operation for read-only or read-protected I/O ports is the same as that for SFRs. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 211 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The SFR window consists of the following areas. * SFR name display area * Attribute display area * Contents of SFR display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) SFR name display area This area displays the SFR and I/O port names. When the I/O port address is an undefined value, the I/O port name is dimmed. (2) Attribute display area This area displays the read/write attribute, access type, and absolute address of the SFR name or I/O port. Whether to display or not display the attribute display area can be selected using [View] [Attribute] from the menu bar. 212 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The types of read/write attributes are as follows. Attribute R W R/W Read-enabled SFR or I/O port Write-enabled SFR or I/O port Read-/Write-enabled SFR or I/O port Meaning The access types are as follows. Access Type 1 8 16 Bit-access-enabled SFR Byte-access-enabled SFR or I/O port Word-access-enabled SFR or I/O port Meaning (3) Contents of SFR display area This area displays and changes the contents of the SFRs or I/O ports. This area is displayed as follows depending on the attribute of the SFR or I/O port. * Read-enabled SFR or I/O port: * Write-enabled SFR or I/O port: * Read-/Write-enabled SFR or I/O port: * SFR or I/O port with values that change when read: Displayed in black Displayed with "---" Displayed in black Displayed with "**" The changed contents are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents before change can be erased with the Esc key. The value of an SFR or I/O port which is protected from reading can be read by executing [View] [Compulsion read] from the menu bar. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 213 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes the SFR window. 214 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE SFR Select Dialog Box General Selects SFRs or I/O ports that are not displayed in the SFR window. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods when the current window is the SFR window. * In the main window Select [View] [Select...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order. Window Figure 6-48. SFR Select Dialog Box Function The SFR Select dialog box consists of the following areas. * Display SFR select area * Display order specification button * No display list display order change button The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Display SFR select area Select the SFRs or I/O ports that are to be displayed in the SFR window, and the SFRs or I/O ports that are not to be displayed. The SFRs or I/O ports displayed in the SFR window are shown on the [Display:] list, and the SFRs or I/O ports not displayed are shown on the [No Display:] list. The SFRs or I/O ports displayed or not displayed in the SFR window can be changed by selecting an SFR or I/O port name from these lists and by clicking the << Show or Hide >> button. If all the SFRs or I/O ports are to be displayed, click the << Show All button. If all the SFRs or I/O ports are to be hidden, click the Hide All >> button. The function of each button is explained below. << Show Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [No Display:] area to the [Display:] list area. Hide >> Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list area to the [No Display:] area. << Show All Hide All >> Moves all the SFRs or I/O ports to the cursor position in [Display:]. Moves all the SFRs or I/O ports to [No Display:]. Two or more SFRs or I/O ports can be selected by clicking the mouse while holding down the control key or the shift key when selecting an SFR or I/O port from the [Display:] list or [No Display:] list. 216 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Display order specification button This button sets the display order in the [Display:] list. The SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list is moved to the top of the list with the also moved up one line with the The function of each button is as follows. button, and to the bottom with the button and down one line with the button. button. It is Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list to the top of the list. Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list up one line in the list. Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list to down one line in the list. Moves the SFR or I/O port selected in the [Display:] list to the bottom of the list. (3) Display order of non-display list change button This button selects the display order in the [No Display:] list. SFRs or I/O ports are displayed in alphabetical order using the button and in address order using the button. The function of each button is as follows. Displays the list in [No Display:] in alphabetical order. Displays the list in [No Display:] in address order. Function buttons Reflects the result of selection and specification of display order in the SFR window and closes the SFR Select dialog box. Cancels the change and closes this dialog box. Cancels the change and restores the original setting. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 217 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add I/O Port Dialog Box General Registers an I/O port to be added to the SFR window. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by either of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Add I/O Port] from the menu bar. Press GRPH + O , and P keys in that order. Window Figure 6-49. Add I/O Port Dialog Box (1) I/O port select area (2) I/O port name specification area (3) I/O port address specification area (4) Access size specification area (5) Access attributes specification area Function The Add I/O Port dialog box consists of the following areas. * I/O port select area * I/O port name specification area * I/O port address specification area * Access size specification area * Access attribute specification area The function of each area is explained below. 218 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) I/O port select area This area displays a list of the currently entered I/O ports. If a new I/O port is entered, it is added to this list. An I/O port that has already been entered can also be selected and changed or deleted. (2) I/O port name specification area This area specifies the name of the I/O port to be added. An I/O port name with up to 15 characters can be specified. (3) I/O port address specification area This area specifies the I/O port address to be added. Addresses can be specified using symbols or expressions. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when inputting numerical values is hexadecimal. (4) Access size specification area This area specifies the access size of the added I/O port. Byte: Word: 8 bits (default) 16 bits Word access can be specified only for SFRs or external SFRs. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 219 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (5) Access attribute specification area This area specifies the access attributes of the added I/O port. Read Only: Write Only: Read Protect: Sets exclusive read only. Sets exclusive write only. Sets read protect. In the default (all unchecked state), read and write are both enabled. Function buttons Reflects the add results in the SFR window and closes the Add I/O Port dialog box. Cancels the change and closes this dialog box. Cancels the change and restores the original state. Opens the help window. Adds the I/O port with the specified address. Changes the settings for the selected I/O port. Deletes the selected I/O port. 220 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Local Variable Window General This window displays or changes the local variable in the current function. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Local Variable] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and L keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-50. Local Variable Window (1) Local variable name display area (2) Local variable value display/setting area Function Displays or changes the local variable. This window automatically displays the local variable in the current function. Variables cannot be added or deleted. The boundary line between the local variable name display area and local variable value display/setting area can be moved to the left or right by the mouse. The boundary can be moved by dragging when the mouse cursor changes from " " to "". User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 221 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Local Variable window consists of the following areas. * Local variable name display area * Local variable value display/setting area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Local variable name display area This area displays local variable names. The type and variable name are shown. These are displayed in the same way as in the Watch window. Also, it is possible to have an expansion display like in the Watch window. However, variable names that have become invalid due to optimization compilation, etc., are not displayed. The auto variable, internal static variable and the register variable can be displayed. (2) Local variable value display/setting area This area displays/changes local variable values. The variable value is displayed in the same way as in the Watch window. Change contents are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key. Function buttons Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window. 222 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Window General This window displays and changes the current stack contents of the user program. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Stack Trace] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and K keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-51. Stack Window (1) Stack frame number display area (2) Stack frame contents display area (3) Stack contents display/setting area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 223 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Displays and changes the stack contents. If the full traced contents cannot be displayed, a vertical scroll bar is displayed so that the contents can be scrolled. The boundary between the stack frame contents display area and the stack contents display/setting area can be moved to the left or right by the mouse. To move the boundary, drag the mouse cursor at the point when it changes from " " to "". This window has an active state only. This window consists of the following areas. * Stack frame number display area * Stack frame contents display area * Stack contents display/setting area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Stack frame number display area This area displays the stack frame numbers. The stack frame number is a natural number starting from 1, and the shallower the stack nest is, the larger this number becomes. A stack number that is 1 larger than a certain function is the calling function of that function. (2) Stack frame contents display area This area displays the stack frame contents. The function or local variable names are displayed. If the stack contents are functions, they is displayed by [Program name $ File name # Function name (Index list) # Line no.]. The delimiter between the program name and the file name is a "$" and the delimiter between the file name and the function name is a "#". The "#" is also used as the delimiter between the function name and the line no. If there are local variables in a function, the local variables are displayed on the following and subsequent lines. 224 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If the contents of the stack are local variables, the type and variable name is displayed. They are displayed in the same way as in the Watch window. Whether to display or not display the variable type can be set in the Debugger Option dialog box. Note that internal static variables and register variables other than current functions are not displayed. (3) Stack contents display/setting area This area displays and changes the contents of the stack. "-" or local variable values are displayed. If the stack contents are functions, a "-" is displayed and the contents cannot be changed. If the stack contents are local variables, the variable values are displayed. Variable values are displayed in the same way as in the Watch window. It is possible to change variable values. Changed contents are written to the target by pressing the Enter key. The contents prior to the change can be erased using the ESC key. Other than displaying the stack contents, this area has the following functions. (a) Jump function Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window, or Coverage window by using the function indicated by the stack frame number at the cursor as a jump pointer. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning. This function is executed by performing the following operations in the sequential order. <1> Position the cursor in the stack contents display/setting area. <2> Perform one of the following operations on the main window. * If the jump destination is the Source window Select [Jump] [SourceText] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination is the Assemble window Select [Jump] [Assemble] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination is the Memory window Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + M . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 225 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * If the jump destination is the Coverage window Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I . Details of the jump destination are as follows. Type of Function Function with the shallowest nest (in the case of the current function) Description of Operation * If the jump destination is the Source window, it jumps to the current PC line. * If the jump destination is other than the Source window, it jumps to the current PC address. * If the jump destination is the Source window, it jumps to the line where the function nested below is called. * If the jump destination is other than the Source window, it jumps to the next address of the instruction that is calling the function nested below. Functions with nests below (in the case of a function other than the current function) Function buttons Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window. Cautions (1) If the stack trace display function has a function that does not push the frame pointer (HL) to a stack frame (such as the noauto or norec function) or the -qf option is added as an optimization option when compiling, it may not be displayed correctly. (2) [ERROR] may be displayed during function prologue processing or epilogue processing. 226 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace View Window General This window displays the trace results. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Trace] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and T keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-52. Trace View Window Function Displays the trace results. The contents can be scrolled by the vertical scroll bar. It is also possible to move up one page or down one page using the button or button. There are two modes in the Trace View window, the normal display mode and the mixed display mode. * Normal display mode: * Mixed display mode: Displays the trace results only. Displays the source file together with the trace results. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 227 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Trace View window can be opened only in the active state and the window's display is updated during a break or step execution. The tracer has a ring structure. For that reason, if data exceeding a valid frame is written, the oldest data is overwritten. Also, in the display, the frames are displayed in frame order with the oldest data as frame 0. Block information is written to the tracer between the end of one execution of the user program and the beginning of the next one. A horizontal line is displayed indicating the block information display in each display area. Block information is written in the following cases, depending on the previous and subsequent execution mode. Previous Execution Mode Real-time execution Execution Mode This Time When executing real-time execution When executing step execution When executing real-time execution When executing step execution after changing execution address Step execution To clear the trace contents, select [Option] [Trace Clear] . Note that, operation with respect to a tracer during program execution is performed by selecting [Run] [Tracer Start/Close] (this is possible only when executing with a break ignored). The Trace View window consists of the following areas. * Point mark display area * Trace mode display area * Trace result display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Point mark display area This area displays the setting states of various events. displayed. If an execution event or fetch event (access operation) is set to the corresponding trace address, the mark corresponding to the type of the event is Note that the marks displayed are not marks from tracing but are event marks set when the trace results are displayed. 228 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Mark E L B T Ti S A M Note Meaning Shows that an event condition is set. Shows that the final level of an event link is set. Shows that a break event is set. Shows that a trace event is set. Shows that a timer event is set. Shows that a snapshot event is set. Shows that two or more events are set. Shows that a DMM event is set Note ID78K0S-NS only. (2) Trace mode display area This area displays the type of trace mode. The display contents are as follows. A: All traces or section-traced frames Q: Qualify-traced frames S: Step execution frames T: Delay trigger frames "T" is displayed for all the frames in which a delay trigger is generated. "Q" is displayed when the qualify trace condition is met while the section trace condition has been met. (3) Trace result display area This area displays the trace results. If this area is selected, the jump function and the window linking function can be used. The following contents are displayed in the trace results display area. Note that display or non-display of each area can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 229 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * Trace frame number display * Time tag display Note * Fetch access display * Data access display * External sense data display * Mnemonic display Note Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. (a) Trace frame number display (Frame) This is where the trace frame number is displayed. (b) Time tag display (Time) Displays the clocks required for the target chip from the start of execution of the previous trace contents to the start of execution of the current trace contents. This is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0SNS-A is used. The count division rate can be changed in the Extended Option dialog box. The Trace Data Select dialog box can select the display or non-display of the time tag. The time tag display can be switched between clock count display and time display. Number of Clocks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time Tag Value Division Ratio 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Division Ratio 2 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Division Ratio 4 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 Division Ratio 8 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note 230 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Fetch access display (Address Data Status) This is where the fetch results of the program and the snap contents are displayed. displayed as follows depending on the status displayed in the status display field (Status). Item Status M1 OP IF SNAP Note This field is Display Contents Program fetch display (the first byte fetch of the instruction) Program fetch display (2nd and subsequent op code fetch) Program fetch display (invalid fetch or status unknown) Snap display No display (blank) Other than above Note Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0SNS-A is used. In the case of the program fetch display, the display is as follows. Item Address Data Display Contents Fetch address display Fetch data display Note that display/non-display of fetch operation access can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. In the case of the snap display, the display is as follows. Item Address Register SFR Memory Data Register SFR Memory Snap Type Display Contents Register name SFR name Memory address Register name SFR name Memory contents (d) Data access display (Address Data Status) This is where the data access results are displayed. Items Status VECT R W Address Data Vector read Data read Data write Display Contents Address display Data display User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 231 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (e) External sense data display (Ext Probe) This is where the input level of the external sense clip at trace time is displayed. This is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. The correspondence of each bit is as follows. External Sense Data Display bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 NO.16 NO.15 NO.14 NO.13 NO.12 NO.11 NO.10 NO.9 NO.8 NO.7 NO.6 NO.5 NO.4 NO.3 NO.2 NO.1 External Sense Clip Number Note that display/non-display of external sense data can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. (f) Mnemonic display (DisAsm) This is where the disassemble result is displayed. This is displayed only when the status of the fetch operation access display is M1. In the trace results display area, the normal display mode and mixed display mode can be switched by selecting [View] [Mix] from the menu bar. * Normal display mode Normal display mode is the mode in which only the trace results are shown. * Mixed display mode Mixed display mode is the mode in which the source file is displayed in combination with the trace results. If the program code corresponds to the displayed program fetch address line, the source file line is displayed before that trace results line. When the load module is downloaded and symbol information is being read, the mixed display mode becomes valid only in cases where fetch address, fetch data, fetch status, or disassemble results are being displayed. 232 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Even in cases where [View] [Mix] is selected on the menu bar and mixed display mode is selected, if none of the above items is being displayed, the display is normal. The source file line's display color is changed and is highlighted in green. The jump function and window link function are detailed below. * Jump function * Window link function (i) Jump function The jump function is executed by carrying out the following operations in order. <1> Move the cursor to the jump source line. <2> In the main window, do one of the following operations. * If the jump destination window is the Source window Select [Jump] [Source] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination window is the Assemble window Select [Jump] [Assemble] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination window is the Memory window Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + M . * If the jump destination window is the Coverage window (The Coverage window is valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used.) Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press the shortcut keys CTRL + I . The address used as the jump source changes according to the cursor position. Cursor Position Access address display area Access data display area Access status display area Other than above Jump Pointer Access address Access address Access address Fetch address Note Note Note Note If the jump destination is the Source window or the Assemble window, the fetch address is made the jump pointer. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 233 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (ii) Window link function The window link function can be used by carrying out the following operations in order. <1> Make the Trace View window the current window and select the window to be synchronized with from among the items in [View] [Window Synchronize] on the menu bar Items in [Window Synchronize] Source Assemble Memory Coverage Linked Window Source window Assemble window Memory window Coverage window Note Note Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. <2> Move the cursor to the synchronization origin line in the trace results display area in the Trace View window. If the window to be synchronized with is not open in the active state, it will open in the active state. <3> The trace results address selected in <2> is used as the pointer, and the linked contents are displayed in the corresponding window selected in <1>, or the cursor is positioned there. In the case of window linking, the address which is the link origin also changes as follows in accordance with the cursor position. Cursor Position Access address display area Access data display area Access status display area Other than above Jump Pointer Access address Access address Access address Fetch address Note Note Note Note If the linking destination is the Source window or the Assemble window, the fetch address is always made the jump pointer. Unlike the jump function, if the cursor's position is moved in the Trace View window, the cursor or the highlighted display in each linked window is also moved. 234 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Opens the Trace Search dialog box and searches trace results or performs pick up. Search results are highlighted in the Trace View window. In the pick up display mode which matched the search conditions are picked up and displayed. This button cannot be selected when a snap frame is picked up and displayed. Note , frames Searches for the trace results that match the search conditions set in the Trace Search dialog box in the backward direction from the cursor position frame (toward the top of the display). This button cannot be selected in the pick up display. Searches for the trace results that match the search conditions set in the Trace Search dialog box in the forward direction from the cursor position frame (toward the bottom of the display). This button cannot be selected in the pick up display. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Close this window. Note The pick up display mode is when [View] [Pick Up] [Search] is selected or when "Pick Up Search Frame" is selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 235 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Search Dialog Box General Searches trace data. If search frame pick up is specified from the [View] menu, or the Trace Data Select dialog box (pick up display mode), pick up of trace data is executed. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods when the current window is the Trace View window. * In the main window Select [View] [Search...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order. * In the Trace View window button. Click the Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G . Window Figure 6-53. Trace Search Dialog Box (1/2) When pick up is not displayed (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8) (7) (1) Status select area (2) Access size select area (3) Address setting area (4) Data setting area (5) External sense data setting area (6) Search conditions specification area (7) Search direction specification area (8) Search range specification area 236 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-53. Trace Search Dialog Box (2/2) When pick up is displayed Functions Trace data is searched and picked up. * If [View] [Pick Up] [Off] is selected from the menu bar, or [Pick Up Off] is selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box, a trace data search is executed. * If [View] [Pick Up] [Search] is selected from the menu bar, or [Pick Up Search Frame] is selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box (pick up display mode), trace data pick up is executed. Note that if pick up of a snap frame is specified from the menu bar or the Trace Data Select dialog box, the Trace Search dialog box cannot be called. The Trace Search dialog box consists of the following areas. * Status select area * Access size select area * Address setting area * Data setting area * External sense data setting area * Search conditions specification area * Search direction specification area * Search range specification area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 237 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Status select area This area sets and selects the status conditions. The status conditions that can be specified are shown below. It is possible to specify the status condition in abbreviated form. There is no distinction between uppercase and lowercase characters in the input status condition. Status M1 Fetch R/W Read Write Vector Read All status Abbreviated Form M1 RW R W VECT ALL M1 fetch Data read/write (including R, W) Data read Data write Vector read by an interrupt All of the above specifications (M1, RW, R, W, VECT) Meaning If the status condition setting is omitted, all the frames become search objects. (2) Access size select area This area sets and selects the access size conditions. By specifying the access size conditions, the access width for the data condition during a trace data search is determined. The access size conditions that can be specified are shown below. It is possible to specify the access size conditions in abbreviated form. There is no distinction between uppercase and lowercase characters in the input access size condition. Size Byte Abbreviated Form B Meaning Search is made with an 8-bit width as the data condition. Search is made only during 8-bit access. An access-size search is not executed. Detection is carried out with a 1-bit width as the data condition. Detection is carried out only during 8-bit access. No Condition Bit NC 1 238 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When an op code fetch access event is specified as a status condition, the selection of Bit is not displayed. Even if Bit or 1 is selected, an error will occur. If Bit is specified as the access size condition, the search is made with a 1-bit width as the data condition. However, due to emulator operation, access to the bit itself cannot be traced directly and the debugger searches for a pseudo bit access by setting the address conditions and data conditions internally as follows. Input Example Address Data fe20.1 1 Trace Search Setting Address Data Mask fe20 00000010B 11111101B For that reason, for access to other bits in the same address, or even for access to all 8 bits in the same address, if the values match the specified values (address, bit), trace data is searched for in accordance with the specified status. * If No Condition is specified, the data setting area is displayed in gray and input is not possible. * If the access size condition setting is omitted, it is judged automatically from the address conditions and data conditions and set. * If a bit is set for the address condition, the condition becomes Bit. * If 8 bits is set for the data condition, the condition becomes Byte. * If the data condition specification is omitted, the condition becomes No Condition. (3) Address setting area This area sets the address condition. The setting range is as follows. (When a bank is not used) Setting range: 0 Address value 0xFFFF 0 Mask value (When a bank is used) Setting range: 0 Address value (n 0 Mask value (n Note Note 0xFFFF << 16) | 0xFFFF << 16) | 0xFFFF Note n is the maximum bank number used. There are two types of address conditions: Address, where the address value is set, and Mask, where the mask value for the address value is input. The setting method is shown below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 239 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) Address Input the lower address and higher address, in that order. The following three types of settings are possible for the address condition. <1> Point setting For a point setting, set a value in the lower address only, or set the same value in both the lower address and the higher address. A mask setting can be made. <2> Range setting For a range setting, set values in the lower address and the higher address. Mask settings cannot be made. Note that if the same value is input for the lower address and the higher address, it is not handled as a range setting. In this case, it becomes a point setting or a bit setting. <3> Bit setting For a bit setting, set a value in the lower address only, or set the same value in the lower address and the higher address. Specify the value in the address.bit format. Mask settings cannot be made. The value of the bit that shows the bit position must be 0 bit 7. For the address value, it is possible to specify a symbol or an expression. The specification method is the same as in the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. If the address condition setting is omitted, detection of the address condition is not performed. (b) Mask Set the mask value for the address value. When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn't matter if the address value is 0 or 1. Example 1. Address: Mask: 2. Address: Mask: conditions. If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. (4) Data setting area 0x4000 to 0x4000 0xFF 0x4000 to 0x4000 0x101 In this kind of setting, the conditions match up to addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF. In this kind of setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100 and 0x4101 match the This area sets the data condition. The setting range is as follows. 240 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Access Size Condition Byte Setting Range 0 Data value 0xFF 0 Mask value 0xFF Data value = 0, 1 Mask value = Cannot be specified. Bit There are two types of data conditions: Data, where the data value is set, and Mask, where the mask value for the data value is set. The setting method is shown below. (a) Data Specify the data value. It is also possible to set a symbol or expression for the data value. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Symbol To Address dialog box, but the default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. If the data condition setting is omitted, data conditions are not detected. (b) Mask Set the mask value for the data value. When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn't matter if the data value is 0 or 1. Example 1. Data: Mask: 2. Data: Mask: 0x4000 0xFF 0x4000 0x101 In this kind of setting, the conditions match when the data value is 0x4000 to 0x40FF. In this kind of setting, when the data are 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101, they match the conditions. If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. (5) External sense data setting area The external sense data cannot be set in this version. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 241 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (6) Search conditions specification area This check box specifies whether to search the whole specified region or not when conducting a search. With the default, only the portion remaining in the range is searched. Searches the remaining portion of the range (default). Searches the whole range. (7) Search direction specification area Specify the search direction. There are two search directions, an upward search and a downward search. Up: Down: Upward search. This searches in the forward direction from the current cursor position (toward the top of the display). Downward search. This searches in the backward direction from the current cursor position (toward the bottom of the display) (default). (8) Search range specification area This area specifies the frame number that is being searched for. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Trace Move dialog box, but the default radix during input of numerical values is decimal. 242 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Searches from the trace results in accordance with the specified conditions. From the search results, the frames that match are highlighted in the Trace View window. For a continuous search, click this button again. Sets the specified conditions as the search conditions and closes the Trace dialog box. Search is executed by the and buttons in the Trace View window. Pick up the specified search data from the trace results in accordance with the conditions. (During Pick Up Display) Only the frames that match the trace window conditions are displayed. conditions and conduct pick up again, click this button again. To change the This closes the Trace Search dialog box. This opens the help window that explains the Trace Search dialog box. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 243 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Data Select Dialog Box General Selects the items to be displayed in the Trace View window. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods when the current window is the Trace View window. * In the main window Select [View] [Select] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order. Window Figure 6-54. Trace Data Select Dialog Box (1) Trace display item select area (2) Trace display radix select area (3) Pick up select area Function The Trace Data Select dialog box consists of the following areas. * Trace display item select area * Trace display radix select area * Pick up select area The function of each area is explained below. 244 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Trace display item select area This area selects the items to be displayed in the Trace View window. The following items can be selected to be displayed or not displayed. If there is a check mark, that area is displayed. Frame: Timetag Note Frame no. display field : Time tag display field * Clock: * Time: Clock display (default) Time display Instruction Fetch Address: Instruction Fetch Data: Instruction Fetch Status: Memory Access Address: Memory Access Data: Memory Access Status: External Probe DisAssemble: Note Fetch address display field Fetch data display field Fetch status display field Access address display field Access data display field Access status display field External sense data display field Disassemble display field : Note Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0SNS-A is used. (2) Trace display radix select area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 245 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area selects the radix to be displayed. The display radix can be selected for the following items. Instruction Fetch Data: Memory Access Data: External Probe Note Fetch data display field Access data display field External sense data display field : Note Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0SNS-A is used. The display radix can be selected from the following. Hex: Dec: Oct: Bin: Displayed in hexadecimal Displayed in decimal Displayed in octal Displayed in binary (3) Pick up select area This area selects the pick up conditions. Pick Up Off: Pick Up Search Frame: Pick Up Snap Frame Note 1 Pick up is not displayed. Picks up and displays frames which match the search conditions. : Picks up and displays snap frames. : Picks up and displays the first M1 fetch frame (BRM1) after a program branch. Pick Up BRM1 Frame Note 2 Notes 1. Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0SNS-A is used. 2. Cannot be selected in this version. Function buttons Reflects the result of selection in the Trace View window. Closes this dialog box. Cancels the change and restores the original setting. Opens the help window. 246 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage Window (Only valid if the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used) General This window displays the coverage result. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Browse] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + B , and O keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. Window Figure 6-55. Coverage Window User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 247 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Displays the coverage result. The vertical scroll bar is displayed at all times and the contents can be scrolled. It is also possible to move up one page or down one page using the button or button. The Coverage window has two states, the active state and the static state. There can be only one Coverage window in the active state, but multiple windows can be opened in the static state at the same time. Active state: The Coverage window in the active state has a display position and contents which are synchronized with the current PC value and which are updated automatically. Also, in addition to becoming a jump destination for the jump function, if it is synchronized with the Trace View window, the Coverage window's display is updated in synchronization with the Trace View window. The first Coverage window to be opened is in the active state. Static state: When in the static state, the Coverage window's contents are updated in synchronization with the current PC value, but the display position does not move. Also, it does not become a jump destination and is not synchronized with the Trace View window. If a Coverage window in the active state has already been opened, a new window is opened in the static state. Coverage measurement is enabled by selecting the check box in [Option] [Coverage ON]. Note that operations with respect to coverage measurement while a program is being executed are executed by [Run] [Coverage Start/Stop]. The Coverage window consists of the following areas: * Address display area * Coverage display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Address display area This area displays coverage addresses. 248 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Coverage display area This area displays the coverage result. The symbols displayed in this area have the following meanings. When in 1-byte display mode Symbol . X R W A $ # % Nothing has been executed. Execution only Read only Write only Read and write Execute and read Execute and write All execution, reading, and writing have been performed. Meaning When in 64-/1024-byte display mode Symbol . X R W A $ # % Meaning No execution, read, and write operations concerning the addresses within the 64-/1,024-byte area were performed. All addresses in the 64-/1,024-byte area were executed. All addresses in the 64-/1,024-byte area were read. All addresses in the 64-/1,024-byte area were written. Reading and writing were executed at all addresses in the 64-/1,024byte area. Execution and reading were performed at all addresses in the 64-/1,024byte area. Execution and writing were performed at all addresses in the 64-/1,024byte area. All execution, read, and write operations concerning all addresses within the 64-/1,024-byte area were performed. This area has two functions besides displaying the coverage results. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 249 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) Jump function Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, or Memory window using the address at the cursor as a jump pointer. The jump destination window is displayed with the jump pointer at the beginning. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Position the cursor. <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. * If the jump destination is the Source window Select [Jump] [SourceText] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination is the Assemble window Select [Jump] [Assemble] form the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination is the Memory window Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + M . (b) Window link function Uses the coverage results to show the linked relationship between the Trace View window and the Coverage window. The coverage results that are the target of linking with the Trace View window are positioned by the cursor. For details, refer to the Window link function of the Trace View window. Function buttons Opens the Coverage Search dialog box and searches for coverage results. Search results are highlighted in the Coverage window. This button can be selected when in 1-byte display mode only. Searches the Coverage results which match the search conditions, and which have been set in the Coverage Search dialog box, from the cursor position toward the beginning (toward the top of the display). This button can be selected when in 1-byte display mode only. It changes to the button during a search. Searches the Coverage results which match the search conditions, and which have been set in the Coverage Search dialog box, from the cursor position toward the end (toward the bottom of the display). This button can be selected when in 1-byte display mode only. It changes to the button during a search. 250 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Interrupt a search. During a search, the and buttons change to the button. Updates the window's contents with the latest data. Closes this window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 251 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage Search Dialog Box General Searches the coverage result. This can be called only when in 1-byte mode display. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods when the current window is the Coverage window. * In the main window Select [View] [Search...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and S keys in that order. * In the Coverage window button. Click the Press the shortcut keys CTRL + G . Window Figure 6-56. Coverage Search Dialog Box 252 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Functions Searches for coverage results. Unmapped areas are not searched. Also, searches cannot be performed when there are unmapped areas between areas to be searched. The Coverage Search dialog box consists of the following areas. * Search data specification area * Search condition specification area * Search direction specification area * Search range specification area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Search data specification area The search conditions can be specified from these 8 check boxes. The meanings of the respective symbols are as shown below. Symbol No Use [.] Read [R] Write [W] Read x Write [A] Execute [X] Execute x Read [$] Execute x Write [#] Execute x Read x Write [%] Nothing has been executed. Read only Write only Read and write Execute only Execute and read Execute and write All execution, reading, and writing has been performed. Meaning If multiple search conditions have been selected, whichever one of the conditions matches is searched (an OR search). User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 253 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Search condition specification area This is a check box which specifies whether to search the whole specified region or not when conducting a search. With the default, only the portion remaining in the range is searched. Searches the remaining portion of the range (default). Searches the whole range. (3) Search direction specification area This area specifies the search direction. There are two search directions, an upward search and a downward search. Up: Down: Upward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the beginning (upward on display). Downward search. Searches the data from the current cursor position toward the end (downward on display). (4) Search range specification area This area specifies the address that is being searched for. Addresses can be specified using a symbol or expression. The specification method is the same as in case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix during input of numerical values is hexadecimal. Function buttons Searches from the coverage results in accordance with the specified conditions. For the search results, the frames that match are highlighted. For continuous search, click this button again. Sets the specified conditions as the searched conditions and closes this dialog box. Interrupts a search. During a search, the button changes to the button. Closes the Coverage Search dialog box. It changes to the button during a search. 254 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the help window that explains this dialog box. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 255 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage-Clear Dialog Box General Clears the coverage results. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Coverage] [Clear...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + O , O , and L keys in that order. Window Figure 6-57. Coverage-Clear Dialog Box Function Clears the coverage measurement results in the specified address range. It initializes the Coverage window and the contents in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box. The Coverage-Clear dialog box consists of the following area. * Address specification area The function of this area is explained below. (1) Address specification area This area specifies the addresses in the coverage results to be cleared. Addresses can also be specified using symbols or an expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix during input of numerical values is hexadecimal. 256 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Clears the coverage results in the address range specified by the address specification area and closes the dialog box. Interrupts clearing the coverage results. During the coverage result clear operation, the button changes to the button. Closes this dialog box. It changes to the button during the coverage result clear operation. Cancels the change and restores the original setting. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 257 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box General Specifies the coverage efficiency measurement range. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Coverage] [Condition...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + O , O , and O keys in that order. * Click the button in the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box. Window Figure 6-58. Coverage-Condition Setting Dialog Box (1) Select list display area (2) Address specification area (3) Function specification area (4) Coverage condition specification area Function The Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box consists of the following areas. * Select list display area * Address specification area * Function specification area * Coverage condition specification area 258 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The function of each area is explained below. (1) Select list display area Displays the currently selected lists. Selected lists can be added by the following two methods. (a) When adding from the function list <1> Specify the status conditions in the status condition specification area. <2> Select the function to be added to the function specification area and click the The specified function can be deleted from the list by using the Note It is meaningless to select an instruction other than Execute. (b) When specifying and adding an address <1> Specify the status conditions in the status condition specification area. <2> Input the address range to the address specification area and click the The specified address range can be deleted from the list by using the (2) Address specification area button. button. button. button. This area is used to input the coverage efficiency address range conditions. Addresses can also be specified by a symbol or expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Address Move dialog box. The default radix during input of numerical values is hexadecimal. (3) Function specification area This area is used to input the coverage efficiency address conditions in function units or to select the function name from the drop-down list. Function names registered to the load module file are displayed. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 259 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Status condition specification area This area selects the coverage efficiency status conditions. The selectable status conditions are as follows: Status Execute Read Write All Description Proportion of program execution performed. Proportion of memory read performed. Proportion of memory write performed. Proportion of either program execution, memory read or memory write performed. Function buttons Closes the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box. Displays the coverage efficiency. Opens the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box. Cancels the changes and restores the original setting. Opens the help window. Clears the contents in the select list display area. Deletes the function name or the address range specified in the select list display area from the list. Enters the function name specified in the function specification area or the address range specified in the address specification area in the select list display area. 260 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box General Displays the coverage results in the range specified in the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box as coverage efficiency. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Option] [Coverage] [Efficiency...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + O , O , and E keys in that order. * Click the button in the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box. Window Figure 6-59. Coverage-Efficiency View Dialog Box (1) Coverage range display area (2) Coverage efficiency display area Function The Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box consists of the following areas. * Coverage range display area * Coverage efficiency display area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 261 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The function of each area is explained below. (1) Coverage range display area This area specifies the coverage efficiency measurement range. The range specified in the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box is displayed in this area. If specified by a function name, it is displayed as "Program name $ File name # Function name." (2) Coverage efficiency display area This area displays the coverage efficiency. The coverage efficiency shows what percentage of the measurement range the specified status (execute, read, write) occupies. The status list is shown below. Status X W R All Description Proportion of program execution performed. Proportion of memory write performed. Proportion of memory read performed. Proportion of either program execution, memory read or memory write performed. 262 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box. Sets the displayed contents of the coverage efficiency. Opens the Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 263 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Manager General This window displays, enables/disables and deletes various events. Through manipulation in this window, the event conditions registered in the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box can be allocated to break events, trace events, snapshot events, DMM events, or timer events. Opening method This window can be opened by one of the following methods: * In the main window Select [Event] [Event Manager] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and M keys in that order. Click the button from the toolbar. * In the Source window Moves the cursor to the source line in the source text display area where the event is set, or to the disassemble line in case of the mix display mode, and carry out either of the following steps: Select [View] [Event?] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order. * In the Assemble window Moves the cursor to the line in the mnemonic display/change area where the event is set, and carry out either of the following steps: Select [View] [Event?] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + V , and E keys in that order. * In the Event dialog box button. Click the Press the shortcut keys GRPH + G . * In the Set Other dialog box Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + M . 264 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-60. Event Manager In list display mode (1) Event display area In detailed display mode (1) Event display area (1) Event detail display area Function Displays, enables/disables, and deletes various events and manages event conditions for registering or setting various event conditions (such as event link conditions, break event conditions, trace event conditions, snapshot event conditions, DMM event conditions, and timer event conditions). The Event Manager consists of the following areas. * Event display area * Event detail display area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 265 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Event display area * In list display mode * In detailed display mode In the event display area, icons (event icons) for various types of event conditions of the registered event, event link, break, trace, snapshot, DMM, and timer are displayed. The icon of the event condition consists of a mark indicating the type of each event condition and an event name. Mark Event name The contents displayed in the event display area can be changed by the Event Info dialog box which is opened by the [View] menu or the The marks are listed below. Mark Indicates event condition Indicates event link condition Indicates break event Indicates trace event Indicates snapshot event Meaning button in the Event Manager. M. Indicates DMM event Indicates timer event The color of the character displayed in a mark indicates the setting status of each event condition. 266 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Character Color in Mark Red , Corresponding Mark Meaning Indicates that the event conditions using events and event link conditions are valid. , , , Black , M. , Indicates that each event condition is "enabled". Each event is generated when condition is satisfied. Indicates that the event conditions using events and event link conditions are invalid. , Yellow , , , M. , Indicates that an event is invalid. The event does not occur even if the conditions are established. , , , , M. Indicates that the symbol specified in the event cannot be , recognized by the program that is currently loading, so it is held pending. In addition to the above function, this area also has the following four functions. (a) Jump function Jumps to the Source window, Assemble window, Memory window or Coverage window by using the address condition of the selected icon as a jump pointer if the selected icon is the event condition. The jump destination window displays the jump pointer at the beginning. If the address condition is a range setting, the lower address becomes the jump pointer. If a mask is set, the point address before the mask is executed becomes the jump pointer. In the case of a bit setting, the address of the specified bit position becomes the jump pointer. This function is executed by performing the following operations in sequential order. <1> Select an icon ( ). <2> Perform one of the following operations in the main window. * If the jump destination is the Source window Select [Jump] [SourceText] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and S keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + U . * If the jump destination is the Assemble window Select [Jump] [Assemble] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and A keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + D . * If the jump destination is the Memory window Select [Jump] [Memory] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and E keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + M . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 267 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * If the jump destination is the Coverage window Select [Jump] [Coverage] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + J , and C keys in that order. Press shortcut keys CTRL + I . (b) Open function Opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected icon's event. The contents of the selected event are displayed in each setting dialog box that is opened. This function is executed by performing one of the following operations. <1> Double-click the icon. <2> Select the icon, then click (c) Enabled state switching function Switches the state of the event corresponding to the selected icon between enabled and disabled. Except for an event and event link, it is possible to operate break, trace, snapshot, DMM and timer events by icons. This function is executed by performing one of the following operations. <1> Click the left button of the mouse when the mouse cursor is on the icon mark. <2> Select an icon and click or , or press the GRPH + Enter keys. . If an event is in the enabled state, it becomes disabled (black), and if the event is in the disabled state, it becomes enabled (red). The button is displayed when an icon in the disabled state is selected, and the button is displayed when an icon in the enabled state is selected. (d) Delete function Deletes registration/set contents of the event condition of a selected icon. Multiple icons can be selected using the SHIFT and CTRL keys. To select all the icons, select [View] [Select All Event] from the menu bar. However, an event condition and event link condition , , can be deleted only when that event , condition is not used by other event condition ( M. , or ). If the event condition or event link condition has already been used for any other event, delete the event used. This function is executed by performing one of the following operations. <1> Select an icon and perform one of the following operations in the main window. Select [Edit] [Delete Event] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + E , and D keys in that order. <2> Select an icon and perform one of the following operations in the Event Manager. Click button. Press the DEL key. 268 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Event detail display area This area is displayed only when the detailed display mode is selected. This area displays the detailed information corresponding to the icon of each event. This area displays the contents of the status condition, access size condition, data condition, external sense data condition, and pass count condition, in that order, by using the information of each key as a delimiter, when an event condition is specified. The following tables show the correspondence between the information of each key and the condition. * Event condition Key Information [S] [Z] [A] [D] [E] [M] Status condition Access size condition Address condition Data condition External sense data condition Mask condition Description * Event link condition Key Information [P1] to [P4] [D] [P] Description Event link condition of nth stage (n = 1 to 4) Disable condition Pass count condition * Break condition Key Information [B] Break condition Description User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 269 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * Trace condition Key Information [M] [D] [Q] Trace mode Delay count Qualify trace condition Description * Timer condition Key Information [S] [E] [U] Description Timer measurement start condition Timer measurement end condition Timer measurement unit * Snapshot condition Key Information [SN] [R] [B] [M] [Z] [F] Snapshot condition Register condition Register bank condition Memory condition Access size condition SFR condition Description * DMM condition Key Information [DM] [A] [D] [Z] DMM condition Address condition Data condition Data size condition Description If the address condition of an event condition, a data condition, or the memory condition of a snapshot condition is a symbol or an expression, the actual address is displayed within "( )". 270 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Opens the New Event dialog box. In the New Event dialog box, by clicking each button, the setting dialog box for event, event link, break, trace, snapshot, DMM and timer events can be opened. Each setting dialog box that is opened has the new event name set in it. After each setting dialog box is opened, the New Event dialog box is closed. is clicked or the ESC key is pressed, the New Event dialog box closes and If the screen returns to the Event Manager. Opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the event condition selected in the event display area. The event condition contents selected in the event display area are displayed in the setting dialog box. If the event condition has not been selected, or if multiple conditions are selected, this button is dimmed and can no longer be clicked. The Enter key also has the same operation. Sets break, trace, snapshot, DMM and timer events in the enabled state. The button is displayed in place of the button if one disabled event or multiple events including only disabled events are selected. Sets break, trace, snapshot, DMM and timer events in the disabled state. The button is displayed in place of the button if one enabled event is selected or multiple events including enabled events are selected. If an event or an event link only is selected, this button is dimmed and it can no longer be clicked. Deletes the event condition selected in the event display area. When deleting an event or event link, if that event is being used by a break, trace, snapshot, DMM, timer or event link, it results in an error. The DEL key also has the same operation. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 271 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Delete All Deletes all the events whether they are enabled or disabled. Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The The rearranging them. The The The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges events by kind and displays them. button displays the events in the order in which they were entered without button sets the display mode to the detailed display mode. button sets the display mode to the list display mode. button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. Closes the Event Manager. 272 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Software Break Manager General This window displays, switches enable/disable, and deletes software breaks. This window can be used only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. Opening method This window can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [Software Break Manager] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and M keys in that order. Window Figure 6-61. Software Break Manager (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Event name display area (2) Break mark display area (3) Break point display area (4) Address display area Function Displays, switches enable/disable, and deletes software breaks. Up to 100 software break events can be valid simultaneously. Note that the setting of the software break point is not performed in this window, but in the Source window or Assemble window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 273 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The software break manager consists of the following areas. * Event name display area * Break mark display area * Break point display area * Address display area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Event name display area This area consists of check boxes to indicate the registered event name and valid/invalid status of the event. To change the event name, edit directly after clicking the name to be changed. The name will be determined by pressing the return key. [Swb + number] is displayed in this area as the default. To validate the event, check the check box (as the default, the check box is checked for a newly created event). Also, double-clicking the event name makes it possible to jump to the window where the event was created (the Source window/Assemble window). Remark By clicking Name on the label, character strings of the displayed items are compared and arranged in alphabetical order (ascending or descending can be switched by clicking). (2) Break mark display area This area displays the mark ">" for the software break event set at the current PC area to make it easy to specify the software break event that has caused the break. 274 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Break point display area This area displays the location where the software break event is set in the following format. File name # line number (when set in the Source window) Symbol + offset (when set in the Assemble Text window) Re-evaluating the event when redownloading symbols is performed based on the above. Remark By clicking File#Line/Symbol+Offset on the label, character strings of the displayed items are compared and arranged in alphabetical order (ascending or descending can be switched by clicking). (4) Address display area This area displays addresses where software break events are set. Remark By clicking Address on the label, values of the displayed items are compared and arranged in size order (ascending or descending can be switched by clicking). Function buttons Validates the event selected. Invalidates the event selected. Deletes the event selected. Delete All Deletes all software break events set. Closes the Software Break Manager window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 275 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Dialog Box General Registers and displays event conditions. The event conditions created (registered) in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [Event...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and E keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. * Execute one of the following operations in the Break, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, Timer or Event Link dialog boxes. Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + E . * Execute one of the following operations in the event setting area or the event manager area of the Break, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, Timer or Event Link dialog boxes. . Select the event condition and click Select the event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O . Double-click the event condition. * In the Event Manager, execute one of the following operations. . Select an event condition and click Double-click the event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or the Set Other dialog box. Click the Event... button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + E . 276 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-62. Event Dialog Box (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) Event name setting area (2) Status select area (3) Address setting area (4) Data setting area (5) External sense data setting area (6) In-range/out-of-range break select area (7) Event manager area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 277 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function This dialog box registers and displays event conditions. Up to 256 conditions can be entered for event conditions. However, the number of event conditions which can be used simultaneously in enabled break, trace, snapshot, DMM and timer events is 8 execution events (or one event link) and 4 access events. When when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, the number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously will increase by 8 for each. The number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously is up to the number of event conditions given above, but a single event condition can be set in multiple break, trace, snapshot, DMM, timer and event link events. The Event dialog box has two modes, the normal mode and the select mode. * Normal mode When the button from the toolbar or [Event] [Event...] from the menu bar in the main window is selected and the Event dialog box is opened, event conditions can be entered without restriction as to purpose. This is the normal mode. * Select mode When the mode. In the select mode, when Event dialog box. Even in the select mode, event conditions can be entered and displayed just as in the normal mode. Depending on the mode, the title bar display on the dialog box will differ. Refer to the section entitled [Title Bar] described later on. The Event dialog box consists of the following areas. * Event name setting area * Status select area * Address setting area * Data setting area * External sense data setting area * In-range/out-of-range break select area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. is clicked, the event condition selected in the event name setting area of the Event dialog box is set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that originally called the button in the Break, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, Timer and Event Link dialog boxes is clicked and the Event dialog box is opened, the event conditions used by these are selected. This is the select 278 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Event name setting area This area sets an event name and selects an event condition. When entering an event condition, it is necessary to set an event name. An event name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters. When displaying event conditions which have already been created, either type the name of the already created event in the text box or select the event condition from the drop-down list in the event name setting area. Note that when moving to another event before completing an event setting, the data which was being set is deleted. In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the original setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box. The mark on the left side of the event name setting area shows the use conditions of the event condition. mark and the status is shown below. Condition That event condition is being used by break, trace, snapshot, DMM, timer or event link and indicates that it is enabled. Indicates that that event condition has not been enabled. Indicates that that event condition is currently being edited and that it has not been entered. Indicates that that event is an event which is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. The relationship between the color of the character in the Color of Character in Red Mark Black Gray Yellow (2) Status select area This area sets and selects a status condition. By specifying the status condition, the distinction between the execution event and access event is decided at the same time. If execution event is specified, the access size select area, the mask field of the address setting area and the data setting area are dimmed and are in a state where input is impossible. The status conditions that can be specified are shown below. It is possible to specify a status condition in abbreviated form. The input status condition is not case sensitive. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 279 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Status Execution Before Execution R/W Read Write External Trigger1 External Trigger2 Abbr. EX EX-B RW R W Trigger-1 Trigger-2 Event Type Execution event Meaning Program execution Program execution (break before execution) Note 1 Access event Memory read/write Memory read Memory write External Trigger (1 bit) External Trigger (ID78K0-NS: 8 bits, Note 2 ID78K0S-NS: 16 bits) Notes 1. Valid only for products with new packages (IE-78K0-NS with a control code D or later or the IE78K0-NS-A (IE-78K0S-NS-A)). 2. Valid only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. Multiple External Trigger1 or External Trigger2 statuses can be registered but only one can be enabled. Multiple Before Execution statuses can be registered but up to 16 (15 in flash self mode) statuses can be enabled. Also, this status cannot be used as an other event condition. This area is blank in the case of newly created event conditions. (3) Address setting area This area sets an address condition. The setting range is as shown below. (When a bank is not used) Setting range: 0 Address value 0xFFFF 0 Mask value 0xFFFF (When a bank is used) Setting range: 0 Address value (n 0 Mask value (n Note Note << 16) | 0xFFFF << 16) | 0xFFFF Note n is the maximum value of the bank number used. Input the lower and higher addresses in that order. The following three types of settings can be made when specifying an address condition. <1> Point setting Only the lower address or the same address value is set to the lower and higher addresses when a point is set. Masks can be set. 280 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE <2> Range setting A range is specified by the lower and higher addresses. Note that if the same value is input for the lower address and the higher address, it is not handled as a range setting. In this case, it becomes a point setting or a bit setting. Moreover, if an event condition is changed during use and if there was a range setting prior to the change, there must be a range setting after the change. Similarly, if there was no range setting prior to the change, neither the address condition nor the range setting can be changed. <3> Bit setting For a bit setting, set a value in the lower address only, or set the same value in the lower address and the higher address. Specify the value in the address.bit format. The value of the bit that shows the bit position must be 0 bit 7. For the address, it is possible to specify a symbol or an expression. The specification method is the same as in the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. This area is blank in the case of newly created event conditions. (4) Data setting area This area sets a data condition. The setting range is as follows. Access Size Condition Byte Setting Range 0 Data value 0xFF 0 Mask value 0xFF Data value = 0, 1 Mask value = Cannot be specified Bit If the data condition setting has been omitted, data condition detection is not performed. For a newly created event condition, the address value and the mask value input columns are both blank. There are two types of data conditions: Data, which sets the data value, and Mask, which inputs the mask value of the data value. How to set each of these types is explained below. (a) Data Set a data value. A data value can also be specified by a symbol or expression. The specification method is the same as in the case of the Symbol To Address dialog box, but the default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 281 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b) Mask Set a mask value for the data value. When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn't matter if the data value is 0 or 1. Example 1. Data: Mask: 2. Data: Mask: 0x4000 0xFF 0x4000 0x101 In this kind of setting, the conditions match when the data value is 0x4000 to 0x40FF. In this kind of setting, when the data is 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101, the conditions are matched. If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. (5) External sense data setting area This area sets the external sense data condition. Setting range: 0 Data value 0xFFFF 0 Mask value 0xFFFE The external sense data condition enables the input pin level of the external sense clip attached to the emulation probe connected to the in-circuit emulator to be a search condition. The correspondence between the external sense data and the external sense clip is as follows. External Sense Data Display bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 NO.16 NO.15 NO.14 NO.13 NO.12 NO.11 NO.10 NO.9 NO.8 NO.7 NO.6 NO.5 NO.4 NO.3 NO.2 NO.1 External Sense Clip Number 282 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The input pin level of the external sense clip is set to 1 for high level and 0 for low level. There are two types of external sense data conditions: Ext Probe, which sets the external sense data value, and Mask, which sets the mask value of the external sense data value. The setting method is shown below. (a) Ext Probe Specify the external sense data value. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. (b) Mask Set a mask value for the external sense data value. When mask setting is made, for a bit with a mask value of 1, it doesn't matter if the data value is 0 or 1. Example 1. Data: Mask: 0x8 0x7 In this kind of setting, the conditions match when the data value is 0x8 to 0xF. 2. Data: 0x8 Mask: matched. If the mask value setting is omitted, masking is not executed. The default radix when numerical values are input is hexadecimal. When the debugger uses the external sense data condition for event detection of the bank address, those bits cannot be accessed. If the number of bits in the bank port is equal to or more than the maximum number of the external sense data condition, the external sense data condition and mask value are dimmed and cannot be input. If less than the maximum, the unused bits of the external sense data condition can be set arbitrarily. At this time, setting bits that are being used by the debugger will cause an error. If the external sense data condition setting is omitted, the external sense data condition is not detected. The data value and mask value text boxes are blank in the case of newly created event conditions. (6) In-range/out-of-range break select area 0x5 In this kind of setting, when the data is 0x8, 0x9, 0xC, and 0xD, the conditions are This area selects the break condition (in-range/out-of-range). In range: Out range: Break within the range (default) Break out of the range This area selects whether the break occurs within the specified address range or not. This can be selected only when R/W, Read, Write, or Before Execution is specified for the status. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 283 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (7) Event manager area This area displays a list of each of the entered events, event links, breaks, trace, snapshots, and timer events. By selecting an event and clicking , or by double-clicking the event, a setting dialog box opens , or press the corresponding to the selected event and the event setting contents can be displayed. When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click DEL key to delete the selected event. , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. By clicking Function buttons Closes the Event dialog box. (Normal mode) If there is an event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. Sets the displayed event as the event condition of the original dialog box that (Select mode) called the Event dialog box and returns to the original setting dialog box. If the Event dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal mode only and the Event dialog box does not close. In other cases, it closes. If there is an event condition being edited, enter/select is performed automatically and the program returns to the original setting dialog box. Newly creates an event condition. An event name is generated automatically and a newly created event condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the event condition using the or the button. Enters an event condition. When a new event condition has been created or when the contents of an event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the event condition using this button. The entered event condition is reflected in the Event Manager. If event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, they cannot be selected. Clears the contents of an event condition. If an event condition is entered but not edited, the in place of this button. button is displayed 284 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Returns the contents of an event condition to the original contents. If an event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is made blank except the event name, or the settings return to the default settings. If an event condition is being edited, the button is displayed in place of this button. Closes the Event dialog box. (Normal mode) If an event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the button becomes this button. Even if there is an event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes without the event condition being entered. operation. Closes the Event dialog box. (Normal mode) If an event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, the becomes this button. Even if an event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Returns to the original setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box without (Select mode) an event condition being selected. If an event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, the button becomes this button. If the Event dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal mode only, and the Event dialog box does not close. In other cases, the Event dialog box closes. Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Returns to the original setting dialog box without selecting the event condition. If an event condition has been edited/changed/deleted, the button becomes this button. If the Event dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal mode only, and the Event dialog box does not close. In other cases, the Event dialog box closes. Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. Opens the Event Link dialog box. Opens the Break dialog box. Opens the Trace dialog box. Opens the Snap Shot dialog box. button The ESC key has the same (Select mode) User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 285 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE DMM... Opens the DMM dialog box. Opens the Timer dialog box. Opens the Event Manager. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. Opens the setting dialog boxes and displays the event, event link, break, trace, snapshot, DMM or timer conditions selected in the event manager area. Deletes the event, event link, break, trace, snapshot, DMM or timer conditions selected in the event manager area. Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays them. button displays the events in the order in which they were entered without rearranging them. The button changes the event manager area to the detailed display mode. The The button changes the event manager area to the list display mode. button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. 286 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Title bar In the normal mode, [Event] is displayed as the title in the title bar. Title bar Event In the select mode, the title in the title bar becomes as follows in accordance with the original setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box. Title Bar Event - Break Event - Trace Event - Snap Shot Event - DMM Event - Timer Event - Event Link Event - Event Link - Break Original Setting Dialog Box Break dialog box Trace dialog box Snap Shot dialog box DMM dialog box Timer dialog box Event Link dialog box Event Link dialog box (While in the Break dialog box select mode) User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 287 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Link Dialog Box General Registers and displays event link conditions. The event link conditions created (registered) in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [EventLink...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and L keys in that order. * In the Event dialog box Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + L . * Execute one of the following operations in the Break dialog box. button. Click the Press the shortcut keys GRPH + L . * Execute one of the following operations in the event setting area or the event manager area of the Event, Break, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, or Timer dialog boxes. . Select the event link condition and click Select the event link condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O . Double-click the event link condition. * In the Event Manager, execute one of the following operations. Select an event link condition and click Double-click the event link condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or the Set Other dialog box. Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + L . . 288 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-63. Event Link Dialog Box (1) (2) (3) (1) Event link name setting area (2) Link condition setting area (3) Event manager area Function Registers and displays event link conditions. If the event link conditions are satisfied, an event occurs only if the user program is executed in the specified order of the event conditions that have been set. Up to 256 event link conditions can be registered. However, the number of event link conditions which can be used simultaneously is 1. The Event Link dialog box has two modes, the normal mode and the select mode. * Normal mode When [Event] [Event Link...] from the menu bar in the main window is selected and the Event Link dialog box is opened, event link conditions can be entered without restriction as to purpose. This is the normal mode. * Select mode When in the Break dialog box is clicked and the Event Link dialog box is opened, the event is clicked, the event link condition selected in the event link name conditions used by these are selected. This is the select mode. In the select mode, when setting area of the Event Link dialog box is set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that originally called the Event Link dialog box. Even in the select mode, event conditions can be entered and displayed just as in the normal mode. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 289 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Depending on the mode, the title bar display on the dialog box will differ. Refer to the section entitled [Title Bar] described later. The Event Link dialog box consists of the following areas. * Event link name setting area * Link condition setting area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Event link name setting area This area sets event link names and selects event link conditions. When entering an event link condition, it is necessary to set an event link name. An event link name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters. When displaying event link conditions which have already been created, either type the event link name of the already created event link condition in the text box or select the event link condition from the drop-down list in the event link name setting area. In the select mode, the selected event link condition can be set in the event link condition setting area of the original setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box. The mark on the left side of the event link name setting area shows the use conditions of the event link mark and the status is shown below. Condition Indicates that that event link condition is being used and that it is enabled. Indicates that that event link condition has not been enabled. Indicates that that event link condition is currently being edited and that it has not been entered. Indicates that that event is an event which is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. condition. The relationship between the color of the character in the Color of Character in Red Mark Black Gray Yellow 290 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Link condition setting area This area sets the sequence of event detection as a link condition. Event conditions are set in four steps, from Phase 1 to Phase 4. Event conditions need not be set up to Phase 4. If Phase 4 is not set, an event occurs when the event condition set to the last Phase is detected. Event conditions can be set in only Phase 1, and same event conditions can be set in two or more Phases. The number of event conditions that can be set to each Phase in the link condition setting area is up to 1. Also, the only type of event condition that can be set to each Phase in the link condition setting area is the execution event. To set an event condition, use one of the following methods. * Click be set. * In the event manager area, select one (or more than one) event condition, then click by a drag-and-drop operation. Setting of an event condition by a drag-and-drop operation is possible even from outside the Event Link dialog box's event manager area; event conditions can be set from the event manager area of each setting dialog box and from the Event Manager. When the focus is on each Phase of the link condition setting area, click condition selected in the Phase which was focused on. It can also be deleted by pressing the DEL key. Each Phase of the link condition setting area and the event conditions in the disable condition setting area can be copied mutually or moved by drag-and-drop. The contents are shown below. * If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition is copied. Selecting only one event condition in the link condition setting area and clicking clicking it opens the Event dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition. or doubleto delete the event or set it and open the Event dialog box in the "Select mode", then select the event conditions to User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 291 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Event manager area This area displays a list of each of the entered events, event links, breaks, traces, snapshots, and timer events. An event condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the link condition setting area or disable condition setting area by clicking . By dragging it from the event manager area in the Event Link dialog box, it can be set in the event setting area in each setting dialog box for break, trace, snapshot, and timer. When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click DEL key to delete the selected event. Also, when the focus is on the event manager area, select one event icon, then click setting contents. By clicking , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. , or press the , or double- click the event icon to open the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and display the event's Function buttons Closes the Event Link dialog box. (Normal mode) If there is an event link condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. Sets the displayed event as the event link condition in the original dialog box that (Select mode) called the Event Link dialog box. If the Event Link dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal mode only and the Event Link dialog box does not close. In other cases, it closes. If there is an event link condition being edited, enter/select is performed automatically and the program returns to the original setting dialog box. Newly creates an event link condition. An event name is generated automatically and a newly created event link condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the event link condition using the or the button. Enters an event link condition. When a new event link condition has been created or when the contents of an event link condition have been changed, be sure to enter the event link condition using this button. Manager. If event link conditions that have already been entered are displayed, they cannot be selected. The entered event link condition is reflected in the Event 292 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Clears the contents of an event link condition. If an event link condition is entered but not edited, the displayed in place of this button. Returns the contents of an event link condition to the original contents. If an event link condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is made blank except the event link name, or the settings return to the default settings. If an event link condition is being edited, the place of this button. Closes the Event Link dialog box. (Normal mode) If an event link condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the button becomes this button. Even if there is an event link condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes without the event link condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Closes the Event Link dialog box. (Normal mode) If an event link condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is displayed. Even if an event link condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the event link condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Returns to the original setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box (Select mode) without an event link condition being selected. If an event link condition is not being created/changed/deleted, the button becomes this button. If the Event Link dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal mode only, and the Event Link dialog box does not close. In other cases, the Event Link dialog box closes. Even if an event link condition is being edited, it is not entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Returns to the original setting dialog box without selecting the event link condition. (Select mode) If an event link condition has been created/changed/deleted, the button becomes this button. If the Event Link dialog box is already open, the select mode returns to the normal mode only, and the Event Link dialog box does not close. In other cases, the Event Link dialog box closes. Even if an event link condition is being edited, it is not entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. button is displayed in button is User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 293 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the select mode in the Event dialog box and makes additional settings in the link condition setting area or disable condition setting area. The area where additional settings are made becomes the selected area when clicked. Opens each setting dialog box for the event selected in the link condition setting area, disable condition setting area or event manager area and displays the contents. If an event is not selected, or if multiple events are selected, selection cannot be made. The operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon. is Deletes the event selected in the link condition setting area, disable condition setting area or event manager area. The same operation is performed by pressing the DEL key. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. Adds an event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager area to the link condition setting area or disable condition setting area and sets it. The area where it is added becomes the selected area when clicked. Opens the Event Info dialog box. is The The them. The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays button displays the events in the order in which they were entered without rearranging them. 294 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The mode. The mode. The button changes the event manager area to the detailed display button changes the event manager area to the list display button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. This opens the Set Other dialog box. Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Break, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, or Timer dialog box, and closes the dialog box. Close the dialog box by clicking Event Link dialog box. or and return to the Title bar In the normal mode, [Event Link] is displayed as the title in the title bar. Title bar Event Link In the select mode, the title in the title bar becomes as follows in accordance with the original setting dialog box that called the Event Link dialog box. Title Bar Event Link - Break Original Setting Dialog Box Break dialog box User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 295 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Break Dialog Box General Registers, sets, and displays break event conditions. The break event conditions registered in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [Break...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and B keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. * In the Event dialog box Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + B . * Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, or Timer dialog box. Select the break event condition and click Double-click the break event condition. * In the Event Manager, execute one of the following operations. . Select an break event condition and click Double-click the break event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or the Set Other dialog box. Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + B . . Select the break event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O . 296 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-64. Break Dialog Box When event manager area is displayed (1) (2) (3) (1) Break event name setting area (2) Break condition setting area (3) Event manager area Function Registers, sets, and displays break event conditions. Up to 256 break event conditions can be entered. However, when the IE-78K0-NS is used, the number of break event conditions that can be used simultaneously is 12, and when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used, this number is 28. Break event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if the number of break event conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the break event conditions are entered in the disabled state. Also, in this case, a break event condition cannot be enabled. Note that if [Run] [Ignore Break Point] is selected, the break event condition will not operate even if it is enabled. The Break dialog box consists of the following areas. * Break event name setting area * Break condition setting area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 297 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Break event name setting area This area sets break event names and selects break event conditions. When entering an event condition, it is necessary to set a break event name. Break event names of up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be set. When displaying break event conditions which have already been created, either type the break event name of the already created break event condition in the text box or select the break event condition from the dropdown list in the break event name setting area. Clicking the event condition. The relationship between the color of the character in the Color of Character in Red Mark mark in the break event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the break mark and the status is shown below. Condition Indicates that the break event condition has been enabled. A break event occurs if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the break event condition has not been enabled. No break event occurs if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the break event condition is currently being edited and that it has not been entered. Indicates that the break event is an event which is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. Black Gray Yellow (2) Break condition setting area This area sets an event condition for a break. The number of event conditions that can be set in the break condition setting area is 12 when the IE-78K0-NS is not installed (8 execution events and 4 access events) and 28 when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used (16 execution events and 4 access events). Also, the number of event link conditions that can be used simultaneously is up to 2, as long as the number of event conditions in use does not exceed the number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously. Carry out setting of the disable conditions by one of the following methods. 298 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE * Click which is to be set. * Click and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link condition which is to be set. * Select an event link condition in the event manager area and click drag-and-drop operation. When setting the event condition or event link condition by a drag-and-drop operation, besides the event manager area in the Break dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box. When the focus is on the break condition setting area, clicking condition or event link condition. It can also be deleted by DEL key. If only one event condition or event link condition in the break condition setting area is selected and is clicked or the item is double-clicked, the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box is opened and the event condition or event link condition contents are displayed. (3) Event manager area deletes the selected event , or make the setting by a This area displays a list of each of the entered events, event link, break, trace, snapshot, DMM, and timer events. An event or event link condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the break condition setting area by clicking condition setting area. When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click DEL key to delete the selected event. Also, when the focus is on the event manager area, select one event icon, then click event's setting contents. By clicking , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. , or press the , or . Also, event conditions or event link conditions in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the break double-click the event icon to open the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and display the User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 299 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the Break dialog box. If there is a break event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. A break event conditions are enabled as soon as it is entered. Newly creates a break event condition. A break event name is generated automatically and a newly created break event condition is prepared. condition using the After it is created, be sure to enter the break event or the button. Enters the break event condition. This button is displayed when a new break event condition is created or when the contents of a break event condition have been changed. In this case, be sure to enter the break event condition. If a break event condition that has already been entered is displayed, this button button or the button. changes to either the A break event condition is enabled as soon as it is entered. Enables a break event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a break event condition is in the disabled state. It changes to either the Disables a break event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a break event condition is in the enabled state. It changes to either the button or the button. button or the button. Clears the contents of a break event condition. If a break event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Restores the break event condition to its original contents. If a break event condition that has not been entered is displayed, the display area is restored to the blank state except for the break event name. This button is displayed in the case where a break event condition is being edited. It changes to the button. 300 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Closes this dialog box. If a break event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is displayed. Even if a break event condition is being edited, this dialog box is closed without entering the condition. The ESC key has the same operation. Closes this dialog box. If a break event condition has being created/changed/deleted, the button becomes this button. Even if a break event condition is being edited, this dialog box is closed without entering the condition. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and selects the set event condition. Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and selects the set event link condition. Displays the contents of an event selected in the break condition setting area or the event manager area by opening each setting dialog box. Its operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon. When the event icon is not selected, or if multiple icons have been selected, this button is disabled. Deletes an event selected in the break condition setting area or the event manager area. Pressing the DEL key performs the same operation. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager area to the break condition setting area. An event other than an event condition or an event link condition cannot be added. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 301 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The them. The The mode. The mode. The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays button displays the events in the order in which they were button changes the event manager area to the detailed display button changes the event manager area to the list display button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. entered without rearranging them. Opens the Set Other dialog box. Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Trace, Snap Shot, DMM, or Timer dialog box, and closes the dialog box. Close the dialog box by clicking Break dialog box. or and return to the 302 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Dialog Box General Registers, sets, and displays trace event conditions. The trace event conditions registered in this dialog box are automatically registered to the Event Manager. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [Trace...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and T keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. * In the Event dialog box Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + T . * Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Snap Shot, DMM, or Timer dialog box. button. Select the trace event condition and click the Select the trace event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O . Double-click the trace event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the Event Manager. Select the trace event condition and click the Double-click the trace event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or Set Other dialog box. Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + T . button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 303 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-65. Trace Dialog Box (1) (4) (2) (3) (5) (1) Trace event name setting area (2) Trace start condition setting area (3) Trace end condition setting area (4) Qualify trace condition setting area (5) Event manager area Function Sets various types of trace operations, and registers, sets and displays trace event conditions. The trace operation settings shown in (1) and (2) below can be executed. (1) Operation when trace data is written to entire trace memory The trace frame makes a scan of the trace memory and when it arrives at the oldest frame, it continues the trace operation and overwrites the oldest trace frame. (2) Setting trace event conditions The following 2 types of trace event conditions can be set but only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used. * Section trace start event condition * Section trace end event condition 304 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Up to 256 trace event conditions can be entered. However, the number of trace event conditions that can be used simultaneously is 1. Trace event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if an enabled trace event condition already exists, or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the trace event conditions are entered in the disabled state. Also, in this case, a trace event condition cannot be enabled. A trace is performed only when the tracer is in the enabled state. Set it by the procedure shown below. * When performing a trace or a qualify trace, select [Run] [Cond. Trace ON], and in other cases, select [Run] [Uncond. Trace ON]. During emulation, in order to stop the currently operating tracer, select [Run] [Tracer Stop] from the menu bar. Also, during emulation, in order to run the currently stopped tracer, select [Run] [Tracer Start] from the menu bar. These two menus toggle and their display changes according to the current tracer state. Note, however, that this operation is valid only when [Run] [Ignore Break Point] is selected and executed. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * Trace event name setting area * Trace start condition setting area * Trace end condition setting area * Qualify trace condition setting area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Trace event name setting area This area sets trace event names and selects trace event conditions. When entering a trace event condition, it is necessary to set a trace event name. Trace event names that can be set must be of 8 alphanumeric characters or less. When displaying trace event conditions which have already been created, either type the trace event name of the already created trace event condition in the text box or select one from the drop-down list in the trace event name setting area. Clicking the event condition. The relationship between the color of the character in the mark and the status is shown below. mark in the trace event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the trace User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 305 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Color of Character in Red Mark Condition Indicates that the trace event condition has been enabled. A trace event occurs if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the trace event condition has not been enabled. No trace event occurs if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the trace event condition is currently being edited and that it has not been entered. Indicates that the trace event is an event which is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. Black Gray Yellow (2) Trace start condition setting area This area sets an event condition for starting a trace. The number of event conditions that can be set in the trace start condition setting area is 16 (8 execution events and 8 access events). Also, the number of event link conditions that can be set is 1. Carry out setting of the trace start conditions by one of the following methods. * Click which is to be set. * Click and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link condition which is to be set. * Select one or more event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click , or make the setting by drag-and-drop. When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in the Trace dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box. When the focus is on the trace start condition setting area, click the DEL key to delete the selected event condition or event link condition. button, or press the and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition It is possible to move and copy event conditions and event link conditions in the trace start condition setting area back and forth among the different setting areas in the Trace dialog box by drag-and-drop operations, as shown below. * If an event condition or event link condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition or event link condition is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition or event link condition is copied. 306 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Selecting an event condition or event link condition in the trace start condition setting area and clicking or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition or event link condition. The trace start condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created trace event condition. (3) Trace end condition setting area This sets an event condition for ending a trace. When Trace Stop is selected in the trace full mode, the trace end condition cannot be set. The number of event conditions that can be set in the trace end condition setting area is 16 (8 execution events and 8 access events). Also, the number of event link conditions that can be set is 1. Carry out setting of the trace end conditions by one of the following methods. * Click which is to be set. * Click and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link condition which is to be set. * Select one or more event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click , or make the setting by drag-and-drop. When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in the Trace dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box. When the focus is on the trace ending condition setting area, click the DEL key to delete the selected event condition or event link condition. button, or press the and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition It is possible to move and copy event conditions and event link conditions in the trace end condition setting area back and forth among the different setting areas in the Trace dialog box by drag-and-drop operations, as shown below. * If an event condition or event link condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition or event link condition is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition or event link condition is copied. Selecting an event condition or event link condition in the trace end condition setting area and clicking or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition or event link condition. The trace end condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created trace event condition. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 307 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (4) Qualify trace condition setting area This area sets event conditions for a qualify trace. A qualify trace is executed only when the trace condition is satisfied. If two or more event conditions are set, the trace is executed when each event condition is satisfied. The number of event conditions that can be set in the qualify trace condition setting area is 4 (4 access events). The number of event link conditions that can be set is 1. Carry out setting of the qualify trace condition by either of the following methods. * Click which is to be set. * Select one or more event condition in the event manager area and click by drag-and-drop. When setting the event condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in the Trace dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box. When the focus is on the qualify trace condition setting area, click the DEL key to delete the selected event condition. button, or press the , or make the setting and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition It is possible to move and copy event conditions in the qualify trace condition setting area back and forth among the different setting areas in the Trace dialog box by drag-and-drop operations, as shown below. * If an event condition is dropped only by the mouse, it is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the SHIFT key, the event condition is moved. * If it is dropped while pressing the CTRL key, the event condition is copied. The event condition in the qualify trace condition setting area can be moved or copied alternately with other setting areas in the Trace dialog box by a drag-and-drop operation. Selecting an event condition in the qualify trace condition setting area and clicking clicking it opens the Event dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition. The qualify trace condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created trace event condition. (5) Event manager area or double- 308 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area displays list of each event, event link, break, trace, snapshot, DMM, and timer event. By selecting an event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area and clicking , the event condition or event link condition, etc. can be set in the delay trigger condition setting area, trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area, qualify trace condition setting area and other setting areas. Also the event condition or event link condition in the event manager area can be directly dragged to each event setting area. When the focus is on the event manager area, select an event icon, and click the press the DEL key to delete the selected event. When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking contents of the event. By clicking , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. button, or or double- clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event, and displays the Function buttons Closes the Trace dialog box. If there is a trace event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. A trace event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Newly creates a trace event condition. A trace event name is generated automatically and a newly created trace event condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the trace event condition using the or the button. Enters a trace event condition. When a new trace event condition has been created or when the contents of a trace event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the trace event condition using this button. If trace event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes to either the button or button. A trace event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Enables a trace event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a trace event condition is in the disabled state. It changes to either the Disables a trace event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a trace event condition is in the enabled state. It changes to either the button or the button. button or the button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 309 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Clears the contents of a trace event condition. If a trace event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Returns the contents of a trace event condition to the original contents. If a trace event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is made blank except the trace event name, or the settings return to the default settings. If a trace event condition is being edited, the place of this button. Closes the Trace dialog box. If a trace event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is displayed. Even if a trace event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the trace event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Closes the Trace dialog box. If a trace event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the button becomes this button. Even if there is a trace event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes without the trace event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the Help window. Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and adds an event condition to the selected position in the delay trigger condition setting area, trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area or qualify trace condition setting area. The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when is clicked. button is displayed in Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and adds an event link condition to the selected position in the trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area or qualify trace condition setting area. The area where the event link condition is added becomes the selected area when is clicked. Displays the event contents selected in the trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area, qualify trace condition setting area or event manager area by opening each setting dialog box. Its operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon. When the event icon is not selected, or if multiple icons have been selected, this button is disabled. 310 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and deletes the event selected in the trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area, qualify trace condition setting area or event manager area. The DEL key has the same operation. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager area to the selected position in the trace start condition setting area, trace end condition setting area or qualify trace condition setting area. The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when is clicked. Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The them. The The mode. The mode. The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays button displays the events in the order in which they were button changes the event manager area to the detailed display button changes the event manager area to the list display button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. entered without rearranging them. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 311 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Set Other dialog box. Clicking each button opens the Event, Event Link, Break, Snap Shot, DMM or Timer dialog box and the Event Manager, and closes the Set Other dialog box. Close the dialog box by clicking Trace dialog box. or and return to the 312 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Snap Shot Dialog Box General Registers, sets, and displays snapshot event conditions. The snapshot event condition registered in this dialog box is automatically registered to the Event Manager. This dialog box can be used only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by one of the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [Snap Shot...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and S keys in that order. * In the Event dialog box Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + S . * Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace, DMM, or Timer dialog box. button. Select the snapshot event condition and click the Select the snapshot event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O . Double-click the snapshot event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the Event Manager. Select the snapshot event condition and click the Double-click the snapshot event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or Set Other dialog box. button. Click the Press the shortcut keys GRPH + S . button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 313 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-66. Snap Shot Dialog Box (1/2) Selection of register snap data (1) (2) (7) (4) (3) (8) Selection of SFR snap data (1) (2) (7) (5) (3) (8) (1) Snapshot event name setting area (2) Snapshot condition setting area (3) Snap data select area (4) Register snap data setting area (5) SFR snap data setting area (6) There is no relevant area in this state (7) Snap data display area (8) Event manager area 314 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6-66. Snap Shot Dialog Box (2/2) Selection of memory snap data (1) (2) (7) (6) (3) (8) (1) Snapshot event name setting area (2) Snapshot condition setting area (3) Snap data select area (4) There is no relevant area this state (5) There is no relevant area in this state (6) Memory snap data setting area (7) Snap data display area (8) Event manager area Function Registers, sets, and displays snapshot event conditions. Snapshot is for saving the contents of the registers, memory and SFRs when the program is executed in the trace buffer. The timing at which snapshot is to be performed is specified by a snapshot event condition. Up to 256 snapshot event conditions can be set. However, the number of snapshot event conditions that can be used simultaneously is 1. Snapshot event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if the number of snapshot event conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the snapshot event conditions are entered in the disabled state. Also, in this case, a snapshot event condition cannot be enabled. Up to 16 items of snap data can be set for each of the registers, SFRs, and memory, for a total of up to 48 items. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 315 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This dialog box consists of the following areas. * Snapshot event name setting area * Snapshot condition setting area * Snap data select area * Register snap data setting area * SFR snap data setting area * Memory snap data setting area * Snap data display area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Snapshot event name setting area This area sets a snapshot event name and displays a snapshot event condition. When entering a snapshot event condition, it is necessary to set a snapshot event name. A snapshot event name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters. When displaying snapshot event conditions which have already been created, either type the name of the already created snapshot event condition in the text box or select the snapshot event condition from the dropdown list in the snapshot event name setting area. Clicking the mark in the snapshot event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the mark and the status is shown below. Condition Indicates that the snapshot event condition has been enabled. A snapshot event occurs if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the snapshot event condition has not been enabled. No snapshot event occurs even if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the snapshot event condition is currently being edited and that it has not been entered. Indicates that the snapshot event is an event which is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. snapshot event condition. The relationship between the color of the character in the Color of Character in Red Mark Black Gray Yellow 316 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (2) Snapshot condition setting area This area sets a snapshot event condition. Only one event condition or event link condition can be set in the snapshot condition setting area. Carry out setting of the snapshot condition by either of the following methods. * Click which is to be set. * Click and open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link , or condition which is to be set. * Select an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area and click make the setting by a drag-and-drop operation. If an event condition or event link condition is already set in the snapshot condition setting area, it is replaced by the newly set event condition or event link condition. When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in the Snap Shot dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box. When the focus is on the snapshot condition setting area, click the DEL key to delete the selected event condition or event link condition. button, or press the and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition Selecting an event condition or event link condition in the snapshot condition setting area and clicking or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box or Event Link dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition or event link condition. The snapshot condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created snapshot event condition. (3) Snap data select area This area selects the type of snap data. The following three types of snap data are available. Item Register Sfr Memory A register can be registered. An SFR can be registered. Memory can be registered. Contents User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 317 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The following displays are switched by selection in the snap data select area. * Register snap data setting area * SFR snap data setting area * Memory snap data setting area Also, if snap data is selected in the snap data display area, the selection items in the snap data select area change in accordance with the type of snap data selected. (4) Register snap data setting area Enter, change or delete register snap data in this area. This area is displayed by selecting Register in the snap data select area. Snap data which is entered/changed/deleted here is reflected in the snap data display area. If register snap data is selected in the snap data display area, the contents of the selected register snap data are displayed. Up to 16 items of register snap data can be entered. The register snap data setting area consists of the following items. (a) Register name setting area This specifies the register name. Specification of a register name is accomplished by selecting the register name from a drop-down list. A general-purpose register or control register can be specified. Uppercase and lowercase characters are not distinguished (in the Trace View window, all the characters are standardized to uppercase characters and displayed). Names that can be specified are function names and absolute names. Note, however, that the snap data displayed in the Trace View window is always displayed as an absolute name. To specify all the registers, select All from the drop-down list or specify directly in the text box. For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank. When entering register snap data, it is necessary to specify a register name. 318 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (b) Register bank setting area This area specifies the register bank. To specify the register bank, enter the value directly in the text box or select from the drop-down list. The setting range is as follows. Setting range: 0 Register bank 3 To specify the current bank, select "Current" from the drop-down list or enter "Current" or "C" (abbreviation) directly in the text box. If the register bank specification is omitted, the current bank will be specified. For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank. (c) button Enters register snap data. Entered snap data is inserted in the snap data display area's select position and displayed. (d) data. button Changes the contents of snap data selected in the snap data display area to the specified register snap (e) button Deletes the snap data selected in the snap data display area. If the focus is on the snap data display area, the same kind of operation can be performed using the DEL key. (f) button Restores the contents of the snap data display area to the original contents. (5) SFR snap data setting area Enter, change or delete SFR snap data in this area. This area is displayed by selecting Sfr in the snap data select area. Snap data which is entered/changed/deleted here is reflected in the snap data display area. If SFR snap data is selected in the snap data display area, the contents of the selected SFR snap data are displayed. Up to 16 items of SFR snap data can be entered. The SFR snap data setting area consists of the following items. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 319 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) SFR name setting area This area specifies the SFR name. Only SFR names that are possible to read can be specified. Also, SFR bit names and I/O port names entered in the Add I/O Port dialog box cannot be specified. The SFR name can be set by typing the SFR name directly in the text box or by selecting the SFR name from the drop-down list. SFR names are not case sensitive (in the Trace View window, all the characters are standardized to uppercase characters and displayed). For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank. When entering SFR snap data, it is necessary to specify an SFR name. (b) button Enters SFR snap data. Entered snap data is inserted in the snap data display area's select position and displayed. (c) data. button Changes the contents of snap data selected in the snap data display area to the specified SFR snap (d) button Deletes the snap data selected in the snap data display area. If the focus is on the snap data display area, the same kind of operation can be performed using the DEL key. (e) button Restores the contents of the snap data display area to the original contents. (6) Memory snap data setting area This area specifies the range of the memory data for the snapshot and access size. This area is displayed only when Memory is selected in the snap data select area. Snap data which is entered/changed/deleted here is reflected in the snap data display area. If memory snap data is selected in the snap data display area, the contents of the selected memory snap data are displayed. Up to 16 items of memory snap data can be entered. The memory snap data setting area consists of the following items. 320 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (a) Memory address setting area This area specifies the memory address range. Input the start address and end address, in that order. The setting range is as shown below. Setting range: 0 Address 0xffff If a value is input for the start address only and the end address is omitted, it is regarded as if the value specified for the end address was the same as that specified for the start address. If the specified address range cannot be divided by the access size, the address range is rounded up and corrected to a range that can be divided by the access size. For the address range specification, it is possible to specify by a symbol or an expression. values are input is hexadecimal. If an expression or symbol is specified in the memory address setting area and then entered and changed, the converted address value is displayed together with the specified expression or symbol in the snap data display area. Only the converted address value is displayed for snap data displayed in the Trace View window. For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank. When entering memory snap data, it is necessary to specify a starting address. (b) Memory display size setting area The specification method is the same as in the Address Move dialog box. The default radix when numerical This area specifies the memory snap data access size. The access size can be specified by typing the value directly in the text box or by selecting it from the drop-down list. The following can be specified. Access Size Byte Word Double word Abbreviated Form B W DW Contents Memory snapshot is executed in 8-bit units. Memory snapshot is executed in 16-bit units. Memory snapshot is executed in 32-bit units. Remark The specified characters are not case sensitive. For a newly created snapshot event condition, this area is blank. When entering memory snap data, it is necessary to specify the access size. (c) button Enters memory snap data. Entered snap data is inserted in the snap data display area's select position and displayed. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 321 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (d) data. button Changes the contents of snap data selected in the snap data display area to the specified memory snap (e) button Deletes the snap data selected in the snap data display area. If the focus is on the snap data display area, the same kind of operation can be performed using the DEL key. (f) button Restores the contents of the snap data display area to the original contents. (7) Snap data display area This area lists the registered snap data. Snap data, including registers, SFRs, and memory data, can be registered. The registered snap data is written to the tracer when a snapshot event occurs. If snap data is selected in the snap data list, the contents of the selected snap data are displayed in the setting areas for the register, the SFR, and memory. Each type of snap data is displayed as follows. (a) Register snap data Register name Example RP0[0] RP1[Current] All[2] (b) SFR snap data SFR name Example PM0 PM1 322 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (c) Memory snap data Starting address Remark Symbols or expressions specified in the address are enclosed by "< >". (8) Event manager area This area displays a list of each of the entered event and event link conditions, and break, trace, snapshot, DMM, and timer events. An event or event link condition that is displayed in the event manager area can be set in the snapshot condition setting area by clicking the snapshot condition setting area. When the focus is on the event manager area, select an event icon and click the press the DEL key to delete the selected event. When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking contents of the event. By clicking , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. button, or or doublebutton. Also, event conditions or event link conditions in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays the Function buttons Closes the Snap Shot dialog box. If there is a snapshot event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. A snapshot event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Newly creates a snapshot event condition. A snapshot event name is generated automatically and a newly created snapshot event condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the snapshot event condition using the or the button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 323 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Enters a snapshot event condition. When a new snapshot event condition has been created or when the contents of a snapshot event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the snapshot event condition using this button. If snapshot event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes to either the button or button. A snapshot event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Enables a snapshot event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a snapshot event condition is in the disabled state. It changes to either the Disables a snapshot event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a snapshot event condition is in the enabled state. It changes to either the button or the button. button or the button. Clears the contents of a snapshot event condition. If a snapshot event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Returns the contents of a snapshot event condition to the original contents. If a snapshot event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area except the snapshot event name is made blank. If a snapshot event condition is being edited, the in place of this button. Closes the Snap Shot dialog box. If a snapshot event condition is not being created/changed/deleted, this button is displayed. Even if a snapshot event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the snapshot event condition being entered. operation. Closes the Snap Shot dialog box. If a snapshot event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the button becomes this button. Even if there is a snapshot event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes without the snapshot event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and selects the event condition to be set. The ESC key has the same button is displayed 324 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and selects the event link condition to be set. Displays the event contents selected in the snapshot condition setting area or event manager area by opening the corresponding setting dialog box. The button is enabled only when the focus is on the snapshot condition setting area or the event manager area, and when a single event is selected. In cases other than that, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked. Deletes an event selected in the snapshot condition setting area or event manager area. The button is enabled only when the focus is on the snapshot condition setting area or the event manager area, and when an event is selected. In cases other than that, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked. The DEL key has the same operation. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager area to the selected position in the snapshot event condition setting area. Events other than the event condition or event link condition cannot be added. Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The them. The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays button displays the events in the order in which they were entered without rearranging them. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 325 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The mode. The mode. The button changes the event manager area to the detailed display button changes the event manager area to the list display button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. Opens the Set Other dialog box. Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace, DMM or Timer dialog box, and closes the Set Other dialog box. Close the dialog box by clicking the the Snap Shot dialog box. or and return to 326 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Dialog Box General Displays the result of measuring execution time, and registers and sets timer event conditions. The timer event condition registered in this dialog box is automatically registered to the Event Manager. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] [Timer...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N , and I keys in that order. Click the button on the toolbar. * In the Event dialog box button. Click the Press the shortcut keys GRPH + I . * Execute one of the following operations in the event manager area in the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace, Snap Shot, or DMM dialog box. Select the timer event condition and click the Double-click the timer event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the Event Manager. Select the timer event condition and click the button. Double-click the timer event condition. * Execute one of the following operations in the New Event dialog box or Set Other dialog box. Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + I . button. Select the timer event condition and press the shortcut keys GRPH + O . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 327 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Figure 6-67. Timer Dialog Box In the case of display of the event manager area (1) (4) (2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (1) Timer event name setting area (2) Timer condition setting area (3) Timer display unit select area (4) Execution time display area (5) Timer rate setting area (6) Timer out time setting area (7) Event manager area Function Displays the result of measuring execution time, and registers and sets timer event conditions. The result of measuring execution time is displayed by selecting the set timer event condition. Up to 256 timer event conditions can be entered. However, the number of timer event conditions that can be used simultaneously is 16. Timer event conditions become valid automatically when they are entered. However, if the number of timer event conditions exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, or if the number of event conditions or event link conditions in use exceeds the number that can be used simultaneously, the timer event conditions are entered in the disabled state. Also, in this case, a timer event condition cannot be enabled. The execution time from the start of the program to occurrence of a break can be displayed. It can be displayed by selecting "Run-Break" in the timer event name setting area. A timer event condition is set only when the timer is in the enabled state. 328 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If the timer is disabled without checking [Option] [Timer ON] on the menu bar in the main window, the timer will not be executed. However, "Run-Break" is not affected by the timer's on/off status. "Run-Break" is included in the number of timer events that can be enabled simultaneously. If there is a vacancy in the setting numbers, "Run-Break" is always enabled and can be used. During emulation, in order to stop the currently operating timer, select [Run] [Timer Stop] from the menu bar. Also, during emulation, in order to run the currently stopped timer, select [Run] [Timer Start] from the menu bar. These two menus toggle and their display changes according to the current timer state. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * Timer event name setting area * Timer condition setting area * Timer display unit select area * Execution time display area * Timer rate setting area * Timer out time setting area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Timer event name setting area This area sets a timer event name and selects a timer event condition. When entering a timer event condition, it is necessary to set a timer event name. Timer event names of up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be set. The timer event name "Run-Break", which displays the execution time from the start of execution to occurrence of a break, is registered from the beginning (this timer event name, however, is not displayed in the Event Manager). When displaying timer event conditions which have already been created, either type the timer event name of the already created timer event condition in the text box or select from the drop-down list in the timer event name setting area. Clicking the event condition. The relationship between the color of the character in the mark and the status is shown below. mark in the timer event name setting area switches between enabling or disabling the timer User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 329 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Color of Character in Red Black Gray Yellow Mark Condition Indicates that the timer event condition has been enabled. A timer event occurs if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the timer event condition has not been enabled. No timer event occurs even if the condition is satisfied. Indicates that the timer event condition is currently being edited and that it has not been entered. Indicates that the timer event is an event which is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. (2) Timer condition setting area (only when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE78K0-NS-A/IE-78K0S-NS-A is used) This area sets an event condition for the timer. Start Event: End Event: Sets event condition or event link condition to start time measurement. Sets event condition or event link condition to end time measurement. The number of event conditions and event link conditions that can be entered in the timer condition setting area is one condition for each of the start and end conditions. Carry out setting of the timer condition by either of the following methods. * Click which is to be set. * Click condition to be set. * Select an event condition in the event manager area and click and-drop. If an event condition or an event link condition is already set in the timer condition setting area, it is replaced with the newly set event condition or event link condition. When setting the event condition or event link condition by drag-and-drop, besides the event manager area in the Timer dialog box, it is possible to set it from the event manager area and Event Manager in each setting dialog box. When the focus is on the timer condition setting area, click the DEL key to delete the event condition selected in [Start Event:] or [End Event:]. condition setting area by a drag-and-drop operation. Selecting an event condition or event link condition selected in [Start Event:] or [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area and clicking or double-clicking it opens the Event dialog box and displays the contents of the event condition or event link condition. The timer condition setting area is left blank when there is a newly created timer event condition. button, or press the , or make the setting by dragand open the Event Link dialog box in the select mode, then select the event link and open the Event dialog box in the select mode, then select the event condition It is possible to move the event condition or event link condition in [Start Event:] and [End Event:] in the timer 330 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Timer display unit select area This area selects the timer measurement results display unit. The unit can be selected from the following five types. nsec: usec: msec: sec: min: Measurement results are displayed in nanosecond units. Measurement results are displayed in microsecond units. Measurement results are displayed in millisecond units. Measurement results are displayed in second units. Measurement results are displayed in minute units. nsec is selected for a newly created timer event condition. (4) Execution time display area This area displays the execution time and execution count of the program. Execution time can be measured up to 14 minutes (in 0.08 s units from 0.16 to 204 s of the resolution). The execution count can be measured up to 65,535 counts. If measurement is not conducted or if the measurement results are cleared, it is shown as a blank. If the measurement results overflow, the message "Timer measurement overflowed!" is displayed. The following functions can be used by operating each button. * By clicking starts. * By clicking * By clicking , the measurement results can be cleared. * "Run-Break" measurement results cannot be cleared. They are cleared automatically when execution , the measurement results can be copied to the clipboard in text format. , the Timer Result dialog box, which displays the selected timer event conditions or the "Run-Break" measurement results, is displayed. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 331 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (5) Timer rate setting area This area sets the timer rate value to measure the execution time. The minimum rate value is 160 nsec (default) which can be increased in 80 nsec units. (6) Time out time setting area When the Timer Out Break is on, time out time can be set, but not when the Timer Out Break is off. When the measurement time of a period (from timer start event generation to timer end event generation) exceeds the time out time, execution ends. Up to 24 hours can be set. (7) Event manager area This displays a list of each of the entered event and event link conditions, and break, trace, snapshot, DMM, and timer events. An event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area can be set in the timer condition setting area by clicking condition setting area. When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click DEL key to delete the selected event. When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking contents of the event. By clicking , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. or press the or double. Also, an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the timer clicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays the 332 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the Timer dialog box. If there is a timer event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. A timer event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Newly creates a timer event condition. A timer event name is generated automatically and a newly created timer event condition is prepared. After it is created, be sure to enter the timer event condition using the or the button. Enters a timer event condition. When a new timer event condition has been created or when the contents of a timer event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the timer event condition using this button. If timer event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes to either the button or button. A timer event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Enables a timer event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a timer event condition is in the disabled state. It changes to either the Disables a timer event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a timer event condition is in the enabled state. It changes to either the button or the button. button or the button. Clears the contents of a timer event condition. If a timer event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Returns the contents of a timer event condition to the original contents. If a timer event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is made blank except the timer event name, or the settings return to the default settings. If a timer event condition is being edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Closes the Timer dialog box. If a timer event condition has not been created/changed/deleted, this button is displayed. Even if a timer event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the timer event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 333 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Closes the Timer dialog box. If a timer event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the button becomes this button. Even if there is a timer event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes without the timer event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the Help window. Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode and adds to set the event condition either in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area. The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when is clicked. Opens the Event Link dialog box in the select mode and adds to set the event link condition either in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area. The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when is clicked. Displays the event contents selected in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area or event manager area by opening the corresponding setting dialog box. Operation is the same as double-clicking the event icon. If an event icon is not selected, or if multiple events are selected, selection cannot be made. Deletes an event selected in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area or event manager area. The DEL key has the same operation. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. Adds the event condition or event link condition selected in the event manager area to the selected position in [Start Event:] or in [End Event:] in the timer condition setting area. The area where the event condition is added becomes the selected area when is clicked. 334 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The them. The The mode. The mode. The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays button displays the events in the order in which they were button changes the event manager area to the detailed display button changes the event manager area to the list display button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. entered without rearranging them. Opens the Set Other dialog box. Clicking each button opens the Event Manager and the Event, Event Link, Break, Trace, Snap Shot, or DMM dialog box, and closes the Set Other dialog box. Close the dialog box by clicking Timer dialog box. or and return to the User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 335 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This button clears the measurement results. When measurement is not being performed, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked. It is also dimmed and cannot be clicked when a user program is being executed. Copies measurement results to the clipboard in text format. Displays the Timer Result dialog box, which displays the selected timer event condition or "Run-Break" measurement results. 336 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Result Dialog Box General Displays the execution time measurement results. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * Select a timer event condition or "Run-Break" in the Timer dialog box and execute one of the following operations. Click the button. Press the shortcut keys GRPH + V . Window Figure 6-68. Timer Result Dialog Box Function Displays the execution time measurement results. This displays the execution time measurement results for the timer event condition or "Run-Break" set in the Timer dialog box. The Timer Result dialog box corresponds 1 to 1 with a timer event condition or "Run-Break" and multiple dialog boxes can be opened simultaneously. The number that can be opened simultaneously is 256 for timer event conditions and 1 corresponding to "Run-Break", for a total of 257. However, the number of measurements that can be taken simultaneously for both timer event conditions and "Run-Break" is 17. The Timer Result dialog box consists of the following area. * Execution time display area The function of this area is explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 337 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (1) Execution time display area This area displays the measurement results of the execution time and execution count of the program. Execution time and execution count display the cumulative execution time, pass count, and average execution time of the measurement period specified by the start event and end event conditions. Also, the execution time is displayed in the unit set for the timer event condition. Measurement Result Pass Total Average Max Min Note Contents Displays the pass count. Displays the cumulative execution time. Displays the average execution time. Displays the maximum execution time. Displays the minimum execution time. Remark Not measured during "Run-Break". Not measured during "Run-Break". Not measured during "Run-Break". Not measured during "Run-Break". Note Note ID78K0-NS only. If measurement is not conducted or if the measurement results are cleared, it is shown as a blank. If the measurement results overflow, the message "Timer measurement overflowed!" is displayed. Function buttons Clears the timer measurement results. When timer measurement is not being performed, it is dimmed and cannot be clicked. It is also dimmed and cannot be clicked when a user program is being executed. A "Run-Break" cannot be cleared. execution starts. Copies timer measurement results to the clipboard in text format. Closes the Timer Result dialog box. It becomes the default button. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. It is cleared automatically when program 338 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE DMM Dialog Box General Sets dynamic memory modification (DMM). This dialog box is only valid when the IE-78K0-NS-PA is installed in the IE-78K0-NS or the IE-78K0-NS-A/IE78K0S-NS-A is used. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] AE [DMM] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + N and D keys in that order. Window Figure 6-69. DMM Dialog Box (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Event name setting area (2) DMM event name setting area (3) Address setting area (6) (4) Data setting area (5) Data size setting area (6) Event manager area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 339 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Registers and displays DMM event conditions. DMM is used to write arbitrary data to a specified address when a specified event occurs during emulation. This dialog box consists of the following areas. * Event name setting area * DMM event name setting area * Address setting area * Data setting area * Data size setting area * Event manager area The function of each area is explained below. (1) Event name setting area This area sets an event name and selects an event condition. When entering an event condition, it is necessary to set an event name. An event name may consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters. When displaying event conditions which have already been created, either type the event name of the already created event name in the text box or select the event condition from the drop-down list in the event name setting area. In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the original setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box. The mark M. on the left side of the event name setting area shows the use conditions of the event condition. If the character in the mark M. is red, it indicates that that DMM event condition is valid. If the character in the mark M. is black, it indicates that that DMM event condition is invalid. If the character in the mark M. is yellow, it indicates that that DMM event condition is in the hold state. An event in the hold state is in a state where the symbol specified by the event condition by program download, etc. cannot be referred to. (2) DMM event name setting area This area sets event conditions for DMM. Up to 16 DMM event conditions can be set (8 execution events and 8 access events). 340 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE (3) Address setting area This area sets the address to which data is written after the event has occurred. (4) Data setting area This area sets the data to be written after the event has occurred. (5) Data size setting area This area sets the size of the data to be written after the event has occurred. The size can be selected from "Byte" or "Word". Example In the case of writing 0xff to 0xFBoo: 0xff is written to 0xFBoo when Byte is specified, and 0xff is written to 0xFBoo and 0x00 to 0xFBo1 when Word is specified. (6) Event manager area This area displays a list of each of the entered event and event link conditions, and break, trace, snapshot, DMM and timer events. An event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area can be set in the delay trigger condition setting area, trace start condition setting area, trace end setting condition area, qualify trace condition area, etc. by clicking Add . Also, an event condition or event link condition in the event manager area can be dragged directly to the each event condition setting area. When the focus is on the event manager area, select the event icon and click key to delete the selected event. When the focus is on the event manager area, selecting an event icon and clicking contents of the event. By clicking , it is possible to select the event manager area display mode or sequencing. or doubleclicking an event icon opens the setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event and displays the or press the DEL User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 341 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the DMM dialog box. If there is a DMM event condition that is being edited, it is entered automatically and the dialog box is closed. This is the default button. Newly creates a DMM event condition. A DMM event name is generated automatically and a newly created DMM event condition is prepared. condition using the After it is created, be sure to enter the DMM event or the button. Enters a DMM event condition. When a new DMM event condition has been created or when the contents of a DMM event condition have been changed, be sure to enter the DMM event condition using this button. If DMM event conditions that have already been entered are displayed, it changes to either the button or button. A DMM event condition becomes enabled as soon as it is entered. Enables a DMM event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a DMM event condition is in the disabled state. It changes to either the Disables a DMM event condition. This button is displayed in cases where a DMM event condition is in the enabled state. It changes to either the button or the button. button or the button. Clears the contents of a DMM event condition. If a DMM event condition is entered but not edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Returns the contents of a DMM event condition to the original contents. If a DMM event condition that has not been entered is displayed, all the area is made blank except the DMM event name. If a DMM event condition is being edited, this button is displayed. It changes to the button. Closes the DMM dialog box. If a DMM event condition has not been created/changed/deleted, this button is displayed. Even if a DMM event condition is being edited, the dialog box closes without the DMM event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. 342 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Closes the DMM dialog box. If a DMM event condition has been created/changed/deleted, after that, the button becomes this button. Even if there is a DMM event condition that is being edited, the dialog box closes without the DMM event condition being entered. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. Opens the DMM dialog box in the select mode and adds the event condition specified in the DMM condition setting area. condition is added is the area selected when the The area to which the event button is clicked. Opens the DMM dialog box in the select mode and adds the event link condition specified in the DMM condition setting area. The area to which the event link condition is added is the area selected when the button is clicked. Displays the event contents selected in the DMM condition setting area or event manager area by opening the corresponding setting dialog box. The button is only valid when the focus is on the DMM event setting area or event manager area and when one event has been selected. In all other cases, the button is dimmed and items cannot be selected. Opens the DMM dialog box in the select mode and deletes an event selected in the DMM condition setting area or event manager area. The button is only valid when the focus is on the DMM event setting area or event manager area and when an event has been selected. In all other cases, the button is dimmed and items cannot be selected. The DEL key has the same operation. Expand Displays the event manager area. Expands the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is not displayed, this button is displayed in place of the button. Does not display the event manager area. Shrinks the size of the dialog box. When the event manager area is displayed, this button is displayed in place of the Expand button. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 343 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Event Info dialog box. The The them. The The mode. The mode. The button rearranges events in name order and displays them. button rearranges the events in order by kind and displays button displays the events in the order in which they were button changes the event manager area to the detailed display button changes the event manager area to the list display button or the ESC key closes the dialog box. entered without rearranging them. 344 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Pass Count Dialog Box General Sets the pass count. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] AE [Pass Count...] from the menu bar Press the shortcut keys GRPH + N and P . Window Figure 6-70. Pass Count Dialog Box Function Sets and displays the pass count. The pass count setting is used to stop execution of the program and tracer after a specified number of events have occurred. The Pass Count dialog box consists of the following area. * Pass count setting area The function of this area is explained below. (1) Pass count setting area This area sets and displays the pass count. The settable range is from 1 (default) to 255. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 345 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the Pass Count dialog box after setting the edited pass count. This is the default button. Returns the pass count to the previous value. Closes the Pass Count dialog box without setting any changes made to the pass count value. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. 346 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Delay Count Dialog Box General Sets the delay count. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Event] AE [Delay Count...] from the menu bar Press the shortcut keys GRPH + N and D . Window Figure 6-71. Delay Count Dialog Box Function Sets and displays the delay count. The delay count setting is used to stop execution of the program and tracer after a stop condition event is satisfied and a trace is performed for a specified count value. The Delay Count dialog box consists of the following area. * Delay count setting area User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 347 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The function of this area is explained below. (1) Delay count setting area This area sets and displays the delay count. Select from the following three settings. | FIRST: | MIDDLE: |#LAST: The trigger pointer is placed at the start of the trace data, and tracing stops after about 8000 frames have been traced. The trigger pointer is placed in the middle of the trace data, and tracing stops after about 4,000 frames have been traced. The trigger pointer is placed at the end of the trace data, and tracing stops immediately. Function buttons Closes the Delay Count dialog box after setting the edited delay count. This is the default button. Returns the delay count to the previous value. Closes the Delay Count dialog box without setting any changes made to the delay count value. The ESC key has the same operation. Opens the help window. 348 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Reset Debugger Dialog Box General Initializes the debugger, emulation CPU, and symbol information. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Debugger Reset...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , and R keys in that order. Window Figure 6-72. Reset Debugger Dialog Box Function Specifies, by using a check box, whether the debugger, emulation CPU, or symbol information is initialized. As the default, only the debugger is initialized. The Reset Debugger dialog box consists of the following area. * Reset subject select area The function of this area is explained below. (1) Reset subject select area This area selects the subject to be reset from the following. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 349 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Selected Item Debugger Symbol Target CPU Description Initializes and restarts the debugger (default). Resets symbol information. Resets emulation CPU. Function buttons Initializes the selected subject. Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box. Opens the help window. 350 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE About Dialog Box General Displays the version information of the debugger. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [Help] [About...] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + H , and A keys in that order. Window Figure 6-73. About Dialog Box Function Displays the version of the debugger and that of the device files, GUI, debugger DLLs, assembler DLLs, executor, and packet DLLs. Function button Closes this dialog box. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 351 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Exit Debugger Dialog Box General Terminates the debugger. When terminating the debugger, the debugging environments can be saved in a project file. Opening method This dialog box can be opened by the following methods. * In the main window Select [File] [Exit] from the menu bar. Press the GRPH + F , and X keys in that order. Also, the Exit Debugger dialog box opens when a compulsory close is executed, such as when Windows is closed or when an application is closed in the task list. Window Figure 6-74. Exit Debugger Dialog Box Function Specifies, by using a check box, whether the current debugging environments are saved in a project file or not when the debugger is terminated. As the default, the debugging environments are not saved in a project file. If the project file has been saved or loaded during a debugging operation, the default is to save the debugging environments. When the check box is checked and the then terminated. If the project file has been saved or loaded during a debugging operation, however, the Project File Save dialog box is not opened, and the debugging environments are saved in the project file. If the terminated. Note that the Exit Debugger dialog box can be set not to open in the Debugger Option dialog box. button is clicked without checking the check box, all the windows are closed, and the debugger is button is clicked, the Project File Save dialog box is opened, the current debugging environments are saved in the project file, and all the windows are closed. The debugger is 352 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons When the check box is checked, the Project File Save dialog box is opened, the current debugging environments are saved in the project file, and all the windows are closed. The debugger is then terminated. When the check box is not checked, all the windows are closed, and the debugger is terminated. Closes this dialog box without performing anything. Opens the help window. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 353 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Error/Warning Dialog Box General Opens if an error or a warning occurs, to inform the user to check the message. Window Figure 6-75. Error/Warning Dialog Box Function Displays the contents of the error or warning in the message display area. Refer to APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST if an error occurs. Function button Closes this dialog box. 354 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX A DEBUGGING WITH ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS This appendix explains the basic debugging operation using the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS. For the details of each window and dialog box mentioned in this section, refer to CHAPTER 6 REFERENCE. (1) Setting debug environment Set the operating environment of debugger. If a previous debug environment has been saved to a project file, the debug environment can be restored by loading that file. The procedure differs as follows depending on whether a project file is used or not. (a) When project file is not used <1> Set all the items in the Configuration dialog box. <2> Set the extended options in the Extended Option dialog box. <3> Set the debug options in the Debugger Option dialog box. (Caution Always specify the startup symbol.) (b) When project file is used * When project file is used at startup <1> Click Project... in the Configuration dialog box. The Project File Load dialog box will open. <2> Specify the project file name and click OK . The project file will be loaded. The following procedure can also be used. <1> Select [Run] from the Start menu in Windows. <2> Use the Browse button to specify the file to be executed, IDK032A.EXE ("IDK0S32A.EXE" for the ID78K0S-NS). <3> After IDK032A.EXE ("IDK0S32A.EXE" for the ID78K0S-NS), specify the name of the project file to be used (eg. A:\nectools32\bin\IDK032A.EXEB:\Test\Test1.prj ( = space)). (A:\nectools32\bin\IDK0S32A.EXEB:\Test\Test1.prj ( = space) for the ID78K0S-NS.). <4> Click OK . * When project file is used during debugging <1> Select [File] [Project] [Open] in the main window, or click the The Project File Load dialog box will open. <2> Specify the project file name and click OK . The project file will be loaded. (2) Download load module file (a) Download the load module file to be debugged. Download dialog box (b) Confirming loaded files Load Module List dialog box button. WINDOW User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 355 APPENDIX A DEBUGGING WITH ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS (3) Display disassemble result Display the result of disassembling the downloaded user program. Assemble window The method of displaying the disassemble display label column and mnemonic column can be changed. Debugger Option dialog box (4) Display source program Display the source program. A program whose source can be debugged must have debug information compiled with the -g option specified. Source window (a) Setting source path information, display font, and source file extension Debugger Option dialog box (b) Selecting source file Browse dialog box (c) Source file and disassemble Select [View] [Mix] when the source text file is the current window. (5) Setting of event (a) Registering event conditions and event link conditions Event dialog box Event Link dialog box (b) Setting of event conditions Set event conditions by using the event icons in the Event Manager or in the event manager area of various event setting dialog boxes (however, breakpoints can be set in the Source window/Assemble window). * Trace event condition Trace dialog box * Break event condition Break dialog box * Timer event condition Timer dialog box * Snap event condition Snap Shot dialog box * DMM event condition DMM dialog box (c) Checking setting of event conditions Event Manager, the event manager area in each event setting dialog box 356 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX A DEBUGGING WITH ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS (6) Executing user program By executing the user program, the value of the PC advances to the set breakpoint, break event or forced break. * Types of execution Execution control buttons on the toolbar in the main window, or [Run] menu (7) Checking trace data Trace View window (8) Editing, checking, and changing contents of memory Memory window Memory Copy dialog box Memory Fill dialog box Memory Compare dialog box Memory Compare Result dialog box (9) Registering, checking, and changing variable values Quick Watch dialog box Add Watch dialog box Watch window Local Variable window (10) Checking contents of stack Stack window (11) Checking and changing registered contents of register value Register window SFR window The PC register value can also be checked in the Source and Assemble windows. (12) Checking and changing contents of SFR SFR window SFR Select dialog box (13) Registering, checking, and changing user-defined I/O port value Add I/O Port dialog box SFR window (14) Changing mnemonics and executing on-line assemble Assemble window Source window (15) Checking execution time of user program Timer dialog box Timer Result dialog box Trace View window User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 357 APPENDIX A DEBUGGING WITH ID78K0-NS AND ID78K0S-NS (16) Checking coverage measurement result Coverage window Coverage-Clear dialog box Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box (17) Searching character string in each window Source Search dialog box Assemble Search dialog box Memory Search dialog box Trace Search dialog box Coverage Search dialog box (18) Referencing "display file" saved in previous debugging process View File Load dialog box (19) Saving screen contents to "display file" during debugging View File Save dialog box (20) Uploading memory contents and coverage results Upload dialog box (21) Saving debug environment to project file Project File Save dialog box (22) Terminating ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS Exit Debugger dialog box 358 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY Words and window types (refer to CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE) used in this document are described below. B.1 Terminology The following words are described in this document. * Debugging mode * Current window * Delimiter symbol (separator) * Program * Current program * File * Current file * Function * Current function * Structure * Stack frame number * Line * Register name * Numeric value * Address * Symbol * Expression and operator * Character set Each word and the input conventions are explained below. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 359 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY (1) Debugging mode Execution of the user program can be controlled in the following three debugging modes. * Source mode Step execution is performed in units of one line of a source text. * Instruction mode Step execution is performed in instruction units. * Automatic mode This mode automatically switches between source mode and instruction mode. In this mode, when the Source window is active, step execution is performed in units of 1 line of source text (instruction units for mixed display), and when the Assemble window is active, step execution is performed in instruction units. When neither window is active, this mode becomes instruction mode. These three debugging modes are selected from the "Option menu" of the main window. When starting the debugger, the automatic mode is selected as the default. (2) Current window The current window is the window in which an operation is currently being performed. information can be input from the keyboard and menus can be selected. (3) Delimiter symbol (separator) A file, function, variable, or line can be specified by using the delimiter symbols listed in Table B-1. Table B-1. Delimiter Symbols Symbol # $ Specification Used as a separator between file names and variable/function names and line numbers. Used as a separator between load module names and file, variable, and function names. In this window, (4) Program A program is the executable unit that is subject to debugging. The ID78K0-NS or ID78K0S-NS deals with each load module file specified when downloading as one program. The name of a program is specified by using the name of the load module file that is downloaded. (5) Current program The current program is the program that contains the instruction for a break currently taking place (i.e., the instruction indicated by the program counter (PC)). When specifying a file in the current program, specifying the program name may be omitted. (6) File The allowable number of characters in a file name is up to 127 characters in a full path. Depending on the file type, it may be possible to specify a file name with more than 127 characters. 360 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY (7) Current file The current file is the source file that has the instruction for a break currently taking place (i.e., the instruction indicated by the program counter (PC)). When specifying a line or function in the current file by using a command, the file name can be omitted. (8) Function Functions constitute a C source program. (9) Current function The current function is the function that has the instruction for a break currently taking place (i.e., the instruction indicated by the program counter (PC)). When accessing a local variable in the current function, specifying the function name can be omitted. (10) Structure Structures and unions of the C language are generically referred to as "structures". When a structure or union variable is used without explicitly specifying a member, the term "structure" is used. (11) Stack frame number A stack frame number is a decimal number starting from 1. The stack contents are displayed numbered. The shallower the nesting of the stack, the higher the number. Therefore, a function having a stack number 1 less than the stack number of another function calls that function. (12) Line A line is specified to identify a certain line in the source file. Line numbers are specified by an integer constant that starts from 1. (13) Register name A register name is specified by the absolute name of a system register or general-purpose register of the 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series microprocessors listed in Table B-2, or by the alias of a register. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 361 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY Table B-2. Register Set of 78K/0 and 78K/0S Series Register Type Register Name Absolute Name System registers PC PSW SP General-purpose registers r0 r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 sp gp tp zero Alias (14)Numeric value The following four types of numeric values can be used. * Binary Input format: nY n...nY (n = 0, 1) * Octal Input format: nO n...nO (n = 0 to 7) nQ n...nQ (n = 0 to 7) * Decimal Input format: n n...n nT n...nT (n = 0 to 9) * Hexadecimal Input format: n n...n nH n...nH 0xn 0xn...n (n = 0 to F) Cautions 1. Suffixes (Y, O, Q, T, H, 0x) and the alphabetical characters in hexadecimal numbers are not case sensitive. 2. If the first character is one of A to F, a 0 must be affixed in front. 3. The radix in the input column switches between decimal and hexadecimal in accordance with the default radix. 362 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY (15) Address * An address is specified by directly specifying a numeric value. * An address can also be specified by using a symbol or expression. * When specifying an address by using a numeric value, hexadecimal, decimal, octal, or binary numbers can be used. (16) Symbol * A symbol consists of characters A to Z, a to z, @, _ (underline), and 0 to 9. * A symbol must begin with a character other than numerals 0 through 9. * This software distinguishes between uppercase (A to Z) and lowercase (a to z) characters. * A symbol name can consist of up to 256 characters. * If a symbol exceeding 256 characters is specified, the first 256 characters are valid. * A symbol is defined by loading a load module file. * Symbols can be classified into the following types by the valid range. (a) Global symbols (assembly language, C language) (b) Static symbols (C language) Static symbols in files Static symbols in functions (c) Local symbols (C language) Local symbols in files Local symbols in functions Local symbols in blocks * The following symbols exist in each of the languages used. (a) Assembly language Label names (b) C language Variable names (including pointer function names, enumerate type variable names, array names, structure name, and union names) Function names, label names Array elements, structure elements, union elements (if the symbol is an array, structure, or union) * A symbol can be described instead of an address and numeric value. * The valid range of symbols is determined based on the source debugging information when the source file is assembled or compiled. * A global symbol only describes a symbol name. * A local symbol is expressed as a pair with a file name. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 363 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY (17) Expression and operator Symbol + - * / Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Meaning Remark Returns sum of values of first and second terms Returns difference in value between first and second terms Returns product of values of first and second terms Divides value of first term by value of second term, and returns integer of result Divides value of first term by value of second term, and returns remainder of result Returns two's complement of value of term Returns two's complement of value of term MOD, % - sign + sign Remainder Unary operation (negative) Unary operation (positive) Logical operators Symbol NOT ~ AND & OR | XOR ^ Meaning Negation Remark NOTs each bit of term, and returns result. Logical product ANDs each bit of values of first and second terms, and returns result Logical sum ORs each bit of values of first and second terms, and returns result Exclusive logical sum Exclusive-ORs each bit of values of first and second terms, and returns result Shift operators Symbol SHR >> Meaning Right shift Remark Right shifts the first term the amount of the value (bit number) expressed by the second term and returns the result. The number of higher bits shifted are replaced with 0. Left shifts the first term the amount of the value (bit number) expressed by the second term and returns the result. The number of lower bits shifted are replaced with 0. SHL << Left shift 364 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY Byte resolution operators Symbol HIGH LOW Meaning Higher byte Lower byte Remark The higher 8 bits of the term's lower 16 bits are returned. The lower 8 bits of the term's lower 16 bits are returned. Word resolution operators Symbol HIGHW LOWW Meaning Higher word Lower word Remark The higher 16 bits of the term's 32 bits are returned. The lower 16 bits of the term's 32 bits are returned. Others Symbol ( ) Meaning Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Remark Executes operation in ( ) before operations outside ( ) Cautions 1. Parentheses "(" and ")" must always be used in pairs. 2. Operations are performed in compliance with the following rules. * The operation sequence is in accordance with the priority of the operator. * When the priority of operators is the same, the operation sequence is from left to right. * The operation within parentheses is executed before the operations outside the parentheses. * Each term of an operation is treated as unsigned 32-bit data. * All the operation results are treated as unsigned 32-bit data. * If an overflow occurs during operation, the lower 32 bits are treated as valid, and the overflow is not detected. 3. The priority of the operator is as follows. Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 Lower Higher (, ) + sign, - sign, NOT, ~, HIGH, LOW, HIGHW, LOWW *, /, MOD, %, SHR, >>, SHL, << +, - AND, & OR, I, XOR, ^ Operator User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 365 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY Symbol Alphabet character Numerals Alphabet equivalent characters Special characters Uppercase characters Lowercase characters Description ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789 @_ .,:;*/%+-'"<>()![]&\^|~#=$?`{} 366 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY Other character set Character . , * / % + - ( ) [ ] & ^ | ~ Period Comma Asterisk Slash Percent Plus Minus Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Left bracket Right bracket Ampersand Control Vertical line Tilde Name Main Usage Direct member operator, bit position specifier Delimiter of operands Multiplication operator or indirect reference operator Division operator Remainder operator Positive sign or addition operator Negative sign or subtraction operator Changes operation sequence Changes operation sequence Base register specification symbol, array subscript operator Base register specification symbol, array subscript operator Address operator or bit AND operator Bit XOR operator Bit OR operator Complement operator User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 367 APPENDIX B TERMINOLOGY B.2 Window Types and Configuration The ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS debuggers consist of windows and dialog boxes. Basically, a window can be opened by using an icon, while a dialog box cannot. B.2.1 Windows Windows are broadly divided into the following two types. * Main windows * MDI child windows MDI child windows cannot be displayed outside of the main window frame. B.2.2 Dialog boxes Dialog boxes can be classified into the following two types. * Modal dialog boxes * Modeless dialog boxes (1) Modal dialog boxes When this type of dialog box is open, the user cannot access other windows or dialog boxes until the dialog box is exited. When the dialog box is closed after the operation in the dialog box has been completed or by selecting the Cancel button of the dialog box, other windows and dialog boxes can be accessed. (2) Modeless dialog boxes Unlike a modal dialog box, the user can access other windows and dialog boxes even if the operation in the dialog box has not been completed. 368 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST The error messages displayed in the ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS consist of Error No. + Type + Message . Figure C-1. Display Format of Error Message Error number Type Message When the OK button is clicked, the Error Message window is closed, and the operation is performed in accordance with the message. The error type is identified by the following three uppercase characters. Table C-1. Error Message Type Type A Meaning Fatal error (Abort Error). The processing is aborted and the debugger is terminated. If this error occurs, the debugging work cannot be continued. Syntax error (Fatal Error). The processing is aborted, and all open windows and dialog boxes are closed. Warning. The processing is aborted. Open windows and dialog boxes are not closed. F W Table C-2 lists the error messages. User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 369 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (1/21) Error No. 0002 F Type This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Check that the device driver for the interface board has been correctly installed. Can not find initialization file (expc.ini). An initialization file (EXPC.INI) cannot be found. Host name not found. No host name is found. Data transfer to ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. Data could not be transmitted to the in-circuit emulator. Check the in-circuit emulator's power supply, cable connection, I/O address settings, etc. Data receive from ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. The in-circuit emulator returns no response. Check the in-circuit emulator's power supply, cable connection, I/O address settings, etc. Failed in reading device file (d0xxx.78k). The device file (d0xxx.78k) could not be correctly read. Illegal data received. Received data is abnormal. No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET, WAIT, HLDRQ and so on. There was no response from the evaluation chip. Check that the RESET, WAIT, HLDRQ (etc) signals or the clock signal are not abnormal. Failed in reading ie703000.ie. ie703000.ie could not be correctly read. Break board is not connected. The BK board is not connected. Emulation board is not connected. The emulation board is not connected. Board configuration of ICE is not consistent. The board configuration in the in-circuit emulator is not consistent. POD/EM1 board is not connected. The POD/EM1 board is not connected. Executor is running. The executor is running. Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini). The initialization file (EXPC.INI) has not been correctly read. Failed in starting simulator. Simulator startup has failed. Not enough memory in starting simulator. The memory at simulator startup is insufficient. Error Message/Meaning 0100 A 0101 A 0102 A 0103 A 0104 A 0105 A 0106 A 01a0 A 01a1 A 01a2 A 01a3 A 01a4 A 01a5 A 01a6 A 01a8 A 01d0 A 01d1 A 370 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (2/21) Error No. 0200 F Type Verification error. A verify error. Bus hold error. The bus is in the hold status. Not enough memory for trace-buffer. Memory for trace frame cannot be allocated. User program is running. The user program is being executed. User program is being breaked. The user program is undergoing a break. User program is being traced. The user program is being traced. Not traced. Tracer measurement is not performed. Trace memory is not set. The tracer is off. No trace block exists. There is no trace block. No event condition exists. There is no event condition. No timer measurement is done. Timer measurement is not performed. No trigger frame exists. There is no trigger frame. Tracer is being stopped. The tracer is stopped. Specified snap-event has not been registered. The snap event to be referenced/deleted is not registered. Timer is running. The timer is operating. Memory copy area is overlapped. The memory copy range has been overlapped. Trace has been already set. Trace is already in the ON status. Event condition is not set. No event condition is set. Too many valid timer event conditions. The number of valid timer event conditions exceeds the maximum settable number. Specified timer event is not set. This timer event is not set. Illegal map range. The map setting is wrong. Error Message/Meaning 02a0 F 02d2 F 0300 F 0301 F 0302 F 0303 F 0304 F 0306 F 0307 F 0308 F 0309 F 030a F 030b F 030d F 030e F 030f F 0310 F 0311 F 0312 F 0313 F User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 371 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (3/21) Error No. 03a0 W Type Error Message/Meaning Target is not turned on. Power is not supplied to the target device. Step execution is being done. This command is under step execution. Timer and Tracer are running. The timer and tracer are operating. Backtrace is being executed. Back trace is under execution. Backtrace is being stopped. Back trace is stopped. Backtrace execution point overrun oldest frame. The back trace execution stop position exceeds the oldest frame. Illegal AND condition. AND condition is illegal. No backtrace information exists. The back trace information does not exist. Last command can not be backstepped. Back step of the last instruction could not be performed. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. Result of timer measurement overflowed. The timer measurement result has overflow. Too many event conditions with path count. Too many event conditions that set path count have been used. Too many address range conditions. The maximum value of the address range specification condition is exceeded. Too many simultaneously-usable-event conditions. The maximum number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously is exceeded. Too many snap-events. The maximum number of snap events that can be set is exceeded. Too many initialization data. The number of initialized data exceeds the initialization area. Too large search data (> 16 byte). The searched data exceed 16 bytes. Too large search data (> search range). The size of the searched data exceeds the size of the search range. Too many Linking-event conditions. The maximum number of integrated events that can be set is exceeded. Too many software breaks (> 100). The number of software breaks exceeds 100. Not enough memory for emulation. The memory for emulation is insufficient. 03a1 F 03a2 F 03d0 A 03d1 A 03d2 A 03d3 A 03d4 A 03d5 A 0400 F 0401 F 0402 F 0403 F 0404 F 0405 F 0407 F 0408 F 0409 F 040a F 04a0 F 04a1 F 372 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (4/21) Error No. 04a2 F Type Error Message/Meaning Too many partition of bus size. The maximum number of delimiters of bus size has been exceeded. Too many execution-event conditions. The maximum number of execution event conditions has been exceeded. Too many bus-event conditions. The maximum number of bus event conditions has been exceeded. Can not allocate buffer. A buffer could not be allocated. Monitor file read error. The monitor file could not be read. Guarded area can not be accessed. There was an attempt to access a guarded area. Different address condition is specified in re-registering event. The address condition when the event was reregistered was different to the previous one. Coverage test is being executed. A coverage test is under execution. Event number with different condition exits. An event number with a different condition exists. Can not register event numbers which can not be used for hardware break. It is impossible to register event numbers that cannot be used for hardware breaks. Event numbers reserved for hardware breaks can not be used. It is impossible to use event numbers that are used for hardware breaks. Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. Communication with the in-circuit emulator could not be established. Check the in-circuit emulator's power supply, cable connection, I/O address settings, etc. Monitor file not found. The monitor file could not be found. Failed in initializing ICE. Initializing the in-circuit emulator has failed. No entry exists for specified number. The entry of the specified number does not exist. Can not relocate internal RAM. The internal RAM cannot be relocated. Illegal relocation address. The relocation address is illegal. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. Invalid attribute. The attribute is invalid. Illegal address. The address is illegal. Not enough memory on ICE. In-circuit emulator alternate memory is short. 04a3 F 04a4 F 0600 A 0c00 F 0c20 F 0c40 F 0c41 F 0c60 F 0c61 F 0c62 F 0ca0 F 0ca1 F 1000 A 1001 A 1002 A 1003 F 1004 F 1005 A 1006 F 1007 A User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 373 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (5/21) Error No. 1008 A Type Error Message/Meaning Can not allocate memory for tables. Memory for tables cannot be allocated. Already initialized. Already initialized. Not initialized. Not initialized yet. User program is running. The user program is being executed. Different bus size has been already specified. An attempt was made to set in duplicate an area with different bus size. Too large bus size. The bus size exceeds the maximum value able to be defined. Too large bus partition size. The delimiter of bus size has exceeded the maximum value. Target is not turned on. The power supply of the target is off. Illegal map range. An illegal map range specification was made. Failed in setting internal ROM and RAM. Setting the internal ROM and RAM has failed. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. No terminal name. This pin name does not exist. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be performed. Internal error. Internal error of the debugger. Illegal I/O register name. The I/O register name is illegal. Illegal address. The address is illegal. User program is running. The user program is being executed. Illegal I/O register number. An illegal number of I/O registers were specified. Illegal bit number. The bit position is illegal. Redraw I/O register name. An I/O register that must not be redrawn is specified. This I/O register is hidden I/O register. An I/O register with a hidden attribute was specified. 1009 A 100a A 100b F 100c F 100d F 100e F 100f W 1010 A 1011 F 1012 F 1013 F 10ff A 1dbe A 2000 F 2001 A 2002 F 2003 F 2004 F 2005 W 2006 F 374 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (6/21) Error No. 2007 F Type Error Message/Meaning Can't read/write. A read/write disabled I/O register was specified. Too big number. The specified I/O register does not exist. Error in device file. A device file error. Illegal value specified for I/O register. An illegal value was specified for the I/O register. Can not copy. Copying has failed. Can not allocate memory. Memory allocation has failed. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication with in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. Illegal address. The address is illegal. Memory has different value. The memory contents do not match. Illegal source address. The source address is illegal. Illegal destination address. The destination address is illegal. Illegal address (source & destination). Both source address and destination address are illegal. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. User program is running. The user program is being executed. Verification error. Verify error. No condition specified. A condition has not been specified. Parameter size does not align with access size alignment. The size of the parameter is not access size aligned. Specified address does not align with access size alignment. The specified address is not access size aligned. Source address does not align with access size alignment. The specified address (Source) is not access size aligned. Destination address does not align with access size alignment. The specified address (Destination) is not access size aligned. 2008 F 2009 A 200a F 200b A 200c A 20ff A 2222 A 3000 F 3001 F 3002 F 3003 F 3004 F 3005 F 3006 F 3007 A 3008 F 3009 F 300a F 300b F 300c F User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 375 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (7/21) Error No. 300d F Type Illegal end address. The end address is illegal. Different access size in specified area. The access size differs in the specified range. Different access size both in source and destination areas. The access size differs in the specified range (Source). Different access size in destination area. The access size differs in the specified range (Destination). Different access size, source & destination. The access size differs between the specified Source range and the specified Destination range. Can not allocate memory. Memory allocation has failed. Failed in writing DMM. Writing DMM has failed. Overflowed mapping area. The mapping area is exceeded. Interrupted. Processing is aborted. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Can not delete specified event number. The specified event number cannot be deleted. Illegal table number. The specified table number is illegal. Illegal start address. The start address is illegal. Illegal end address. The end address is illegal. Illegal status. The status is illegal. Illegal data. The data is illegal. Specified event number has been already used. An attempt was made to specify an event number that has already been used. Too many same events are registered. The maximum of the number of registered events of the same type is exceeded. Specified event has not been registered. The specified event is not registered. Illegal data size. The data size is illegal. Error Message/Meaning 300e F 300f F 3010 F 3011 F 3012 A 3013 A 3014 F 3015 A 3016 F 30ff A 4000 F 4001 F 4002 F 4003 F 4004 F 4005 F 4006 F 4007 F 4008 F 4009 F 376 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (8/21) Error No. 400a F Type Illegal mode. The mode is illegal. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. Illegal type. The type is illegal. Too many identical events are registered (>= 32767). An attempt was made to make registration exceeding 32,767 of the same registered events. Specified event condition does not exist. The specified event condition does not exist. Illegal event link condition. An event link condition is illegal. Function not found. The specified function was not found. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Timer is being disabled. The timer is invalid. Access size is different from its mapped bus size. The access size and mapped bus size differ. Can not use software break. Software break cannot be used. Can not use event condition specifying address range. An event condition with a range specified cannot be used for an address condition. Can not change event condition. The event condition cannot be changed. Can not access word at odd address. Word access to an odd address cannot be performed. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Not support. This function is not supported. No Event. There is no event. Can not use tag-event. A tag event cannot be used. Illegal memory bank setting. The setting of the memory bank is illegal. Illegal type. The type is illegal. Can not allocate memory. Memory allocation has failed. Error Message/Meaning 400b F 400c F 400d F 400e F 400f F 4010 F 4011 F 4012 F 4013 W 4014 F 4015 F 4016 F 4017 F 4018 A 4019 F 401a F 401b F 4318 F 5000 A 5001 A User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 377 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (9/21) Error No. 5002 A Type Can not open device file. Opening the device file has failed. Can not seek device file. Seeking the device file has failed. Can not close device file. Closing the device file has failed. Illegal device file format. The format of the device file is wrong. Failed in initializing ICE. Initializing the in-circuit emulator has failed. Device information does not exist. Device information is missing. Can not open device file. The specified device file cannot be opened. Can not open ie703000.ie. ie703000.ie cannot be opened. Specified device file is illegal version. The version of the device file is illegal. Specified device file does not relocate IRAM. This device file does not relocate IRAM. Failed in reading expc.ini. The initialization file (EXPC.INI) cannot be correctly read. Not enough memory. The memory has run short. Illegal type. The type is illegal. Can not allocate memory. Memory allocation has failed. Can not open database file. The database file could not be opened. Can not seek database file. The database file could not be searched. Can not close database file. The database file could not be closed. Illegal device format. The format of the database file is illegal. Database information has been already initialized. Initialization of the database information is already finished. Database information does not exist. There is no database information. Can not open specified database file. The specified database file could not be opened. Error Message/Meaning 5003 A 5004 A 5005 A 5006 A 5007 A 5008 F 5009 F 500a F 500b W 500c A 500d A 5300 A 5301 A 5302 A 5303 A 5304 A 5305 A 5306 A 5307 A 5308 F 378 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (10/21) Error No. 5309 F Type Error Message/Meaning Specified database file is illegal version. The version of the database file is illegal. Current function does not exist. The current function does not exist. Illegal symbol name. The symbol name is illegal. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. Illegal function name. The function name is illegal. Overflowed output buffer size. The data size exceeds that of the output buffer. Illegal expression. The expression is illegal. Illegal mode. The specified mode is wrong. User program is running. The user program is being executed. User program has been stopped. The user program is being stopped. Trace enabled. Trace is being executed. Trace memory is not set. The trace memory is OFF. Function return address does not exist, can not do step execution. The return address of the function does not exist. Step execution is not performed. No source information exists. The source information is missing. Unknown result of step execution. The result of step execution is unknown. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Bus hold error. The bus is in the hold status. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Canceled step wait. The wait status following completion of step execution has been canceled. Interrupted step execution. Step execution processing was aborted. Aborted step execution. Step execution processing was forcibly terminated. 6000 F 6001 F 6002 F 6003 F 6004 F 6005 F 7000 F 7001 F 7002 F 7003 F 7004 F 7005 F 7010 W 7011 W 7012 A 70fe A 70ff A 7801 F 7802 F 7f00 F User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 379 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (11/21) Error No. 7f02 F Type Suspended step execution. Step execution was aborted. Failed in canceling RUN/STEP. Canceling RUN/STEP has failed. Can not execute non-mapped area. An attempt is made to execute from an area not mapped. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. File not found. The specified file is not found. Illegal line number. The line number is illegal. Current information is not set. The current information is not set. Illegal address. The address is illegal. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Specified register symbol does not exist. The specified register symbol does not exist. Specified register symbol ID does not exist. The specified register symbol ID does not exist. Illegal value. The specified value is illegal. Illegal condition. The specified condition is illegal. Too large register size. The register size is too big. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Illegal expression. The expression is illegal. Start address is bigger than the end address. The start and end address specifications have been reversed. Illegal source path. The specified source path information is illegal. Too long expression. The expression is too long. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Illegal argument. The argument is illegal. Error Message/Meaning 7f03 A 7f04 F 7f05 F 8000 F 8001 F 8002 F 8003 F 8004 F 9000 A 9001 A 9002 F 9003 A 9004 A 9005 F a001 F a002 F a003 F a004 F a005 A a006 F 380 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (12/21) Error No. a007 A Type Illegal program number. The program number is wrong. Source path is not set. The source path is not set. File not found. The file is not found. Can not open file. Opening the file has failed. Can not close file. Closing the file has failed. Failed in reading file. Reading the file has failed. Not source file of load module. This is not the load module's source file. Illegal line number. The line number is illegal. Variable does not exist. The variable does not exist. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication with the in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Can not access register. The register cannot be accessed. Can not access memory. The memory (variable) cannot be accessed. Can not seek file. Seeking a file has failed. This is binary file. This is a binary file. Can not get temporary path. A temporary path could not be allocated. Can not create temporary file. A temporary file could not be created. Can not remove temporary file. A temporary file could not be deleted. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Specified symbol is assigned to register. The specified symbol has already been assigned to a register. Illegal command line. The command line is illegal. Program information does not exist in specified load module file. The load module file does not have program information. Error Message/Meaning a008 F a009 F a00a F a00b A a00c A a00d F a00e F a00f F a010 A a011 F a012 F a013 F a014 F a015 F a016 F a017 F a020 F a021 F b000 F b001 F User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 381 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (13/21) Error No. b002 F Type File not found. The file is not found. Function not found. The function is not found. Illegal magic number. The magic number is illegal. Symbol not found. The symbol is not found. Illegal expression. The expression is illegal. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Illegal symbol in load module file. An illegal symbol exists in the load module file. Current program does not exist. The current program does not exist. Current file does not exist. The current file does not exist. Current function does not exist. A current function does not exist. Current line does not exist. A current line does not exist. Tag not found. No tag is found. Failed in loading symbol table. Loading the symbol table has failed. Illegal line number. The line number is illegal. Too large line number. The line number is too large. Failed in reading file. Reading the file has failed. Can not open file. Opening the file has failed. Failed in writing file. Writing the file has failed. Can not seek file. Seeking the file has failed. Can not close file. Closing the file has failed. Too long load module file name. The file name of the load module is too long. Error Message/Meaning b003 F b004 F b005 F b008 F b009 A b00a F b00b F b00c F b00d A b00e A b00f A b010 A b011 A b012 F b015 A b016 A b017 A b019 A b01a A b01b A 382 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (14/21) Error No. b01c A Type Error Message/Meaning Too many entries of the task kind. There are too many task classification entries. Address not found. The address does not exist. No line information (not compile with -g). There is no line information (it was not compiled using -g). Can not find structure member. The member of the structure cannot be found. Can not find value. The value could not be found. No symbol information exists in load module file. The load module file does not have symbol information. Illegal line number. The line number is illegal. Current stack frame is not active. The current stack frame is not active. Different section. The section is wrong. Too many array dimensions (> 4). The displayed array exceeds the fourth dimension. Found end of file. The file ends in the middle. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Illegal address. The address is illegal. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication between in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Can not stack trace with current PC value. Stack trace cannot be executed with the current PC value. Too many blocks for one function. The maximum number of blocks allowable in 1 function has been exceeded. Illegal argument. The argument passed to the function is illegal. Path not found. The specified path is not found. Information has been deleted because of optimization. Information has been deleted as a result of optimization. Monitor timed out. Timeout for the monitor. Already set in memory. Already set on the memory. b01d F b01e W b01f F b020 F b021 F b022 F b023 A b024 A b026 F b027 F b028 F b029 F b02a A b02b F b02c F b02d F b02e A b02f A b030 A b031 A User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 383 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (15/21) Error No. b032 A Type Out of scope. Out of scope. LP is not stored. LP has not been stored. Inside of prologue or epilogue. Within the prologue or epilogue. Out of variable region. The specified variable cannot be referenced by the current PC. Too Many Line-Numbers Information. There is too much line information. Compiler version missmatch. Because this compiler version is not supported, the debug information could not be loaded. Failed in loading debug information. The debug information could not be loaded. No more section information. There is no section information. Specified file is not load module. The specified file is not in a load module format. Too many files in load module to download. The number of files in the load module exceeds the maximum number the debugger can handle. Symbol module is not initialized. The SYM module has not been initialized. Illegal port number. An illegal port number. Illegal port name. An illegal port name. Illegal port position. The bit position of the specified port is illegal. Illegal increment number. The specified increment count is illegal. Port for memory bank is not set. The port for memory bank is not set. Illegal bank number. An illegal bank number is specified. Area for memory bank is not set. An area for memory bank is not set. Too long symbol name. The symbol name is longer than the maximum allowable length. Can not open file. Opening the file has failed. Can not close file. Closing the file has failed. Error Message/Meaning b033 A b034 A b036 W b037 F b038 F b039 A b03a A b040 A b041 A b042 W b32e F b32f F b330 F b331 F b332 F b333 F b334 F b335 W c001 F c002 A 384 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (16/21) Error No. c003 A Type Failed in reading file. Reading the file has failed. Can not seek file. Seeking the file has failed. Illegal file type. A non-existent file type has been specified. Illegal magic number. The magic number is illegal. Specified file is not load module. The specified file is not in a load module format. Specified load module file (ELF) is old version. The version of the load module file (ELF) is old. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Illegal address. The address is illegal. Load module is not loaded. The load module is not loaded. Illegal argument. The argument is illegal. User program is being emulated. The user program is being emulated. User program is being traced. The user program is being traced. Interrupted. Under processing. Can not communicate with ICE. A communication error has occurred. Communication between the in-circuit emulator cannot be established. Illegal load module file format. The format of the load module file is wrong. Check sum error. A check sum error has occurred. Too wide address range to upload (> 1M byte) The address range to be uploaded exceeds 1 MB. Failed in writing file. Writing the file has failed. Illegal program number. The program number is illegal. Load information is full. The load information is full. Symbol information is duplicated, please reset symbols. The symbol information overlaps. Reset the symbol. Error Message/Meaning c004 A c005 F c006 F c007 F c008 F c009 F c00a F c00b F c00c F c00d F c00e F c00f A c010 A c011 F c012 F c013 F c014 F c015 F c016 F c017 W User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 385 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (17/21) Error No. c018 F Type Error Message/Meaning Specified file is not load module. The specified file is not in a load module format. Failed in writing memory. Memory could not be written to. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Internal error. An error occurs inside the debugger. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini). The initialization file (EXPC.INI) cannot be read correctly. ICE is not connected. The in-circuit emulator is not connected. Can not find Dynamic Link Library. The dynamic link library could not be found. Illegal argument. The argument is illegal. Illegal start address. The start address is illegal. Illegal end address. The end address is illegal. Too large size. The address size is too large. Can not open file. Opening the file has failed. Failed in reading file. Reading the file has failed. Can not seek file. Seeking the file has failed. Failed in writing file. Writing the file has failed. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. Illegal file format. The file format is wrong. Verification error. Verify error. This feature is not supported. This function is not supported. Not enough memory. Application has run out of memory. c019 F c100 F d000 A d001 F d002 A d003 A d004 A e000 F e001 F e002 F e003 F e004 F e005 F e006 F e007 F e008 F e009 F e00a F e010 F f000 F 386 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (18/21) Error No. f001 F Type XXX not found. XXX could not be found. not found XXX. Search from the beginning? XXX could not be found. Do you want to search from the beginning? Already exceed search region The search range has already been exceeded. Missing parameter. The parameter is illegal. Illegal name. The name is illegal. Illegal number. The number is illegal. Start address is bigger than end address. Start address is bigger than end address. Illegal expression The expression is illegal. XXX This file is illegal type. XXX This file is an illegal type. Disk cannot write or full. Either the disk could not be written to or it is full. File not found. This file could not be found. File not Create. This file could not be created. Old file version. This file is an old version. Illegal file type. The file format is illegal. This file is a project file for XXXX Please select a correct file. This project file is a file for XXX. Specify a correct file. No differences encountered. There were no differences found. Memory mapping error. The memory could not be mapped. Verify error. Verify error. Would you like to save the changes made in XXX? Do you want the changes made in XXX to be saved? The symbol being used on the event condition can't be evaluated. The symbol being used in the event condition could not be evaluated. Delete XXX? Do you want XXX to be deleted? Error Message/Meaning f002 F f003 W f004 F f005 F f006 F f007 F f008 F f009 F f100 F f101 F f102 F f103 F f104 F f105 F f200 W f201 F f202 F f300 F f301 F f302 F User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 387 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (19/21) Error No. f303 F Type Error Message/Meaning XXX is edited. Delete YYY? XXX is being edited; do you want YYY to be deleted? XXX is edited. Save YYY? XXX is being edited; do you want YYY to be saved? XXX is already exist. Do you replace it? Do you want to replace the existing XXX? This name is too long. This name is too long. There is the same name in other kinds. The same name is being used in other conditions. An address can't be omitted. An address cannot be omitted. Illegal address mask. The address mask is illegal. Illegal data mask. The data mask is illegal. Illegal ext probe mask. The external probe mask is illegal. Illegal ext probe data. The external probe data is illegal. Illegal pass count. The pass count is illegal. Illegal register name. The register name is illegal. Illegal register bank. The register bank is illegal. Illegal delay count. The delay count is illegal. Only one XXX can be enabled. Do you make this YYY to enable? Only one XXX can be enabled; do you want to enable YYY? XXX is already there. XXX already exists. Event number already exist. This event number already exists. Event name is not set. The event name has not been set. XXX is already there. XXX already exists. Max number of XXX enabled event is over. Please disable other enabled event. The maximum allowable number of valid event conditions has been exceeded. Disable other event conditions. Max number of set event is over. The maximum number of settable event conditions has been exceeded. f304 F f305 F f306 F f307 F f308 F f309 F f30a F f30b F f30c F f30d F f30e F f30f F f310 F f311 F f312 F f313 F f314 F f315 F f316 F f317 F 388 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (20/21) Error No. f318 F Type Error Message/Meaning Max number of set event link is over. The maximum number of settable event link conditions has been exceeded. Max number of set break event is over. The maximum number of settable break conditions has been exceeded. Max number of set trace event is over. The maximum number of settable trace conditions has been exceeded. Max number of set snap event is over. The maximum number of settable snap conditions has been exceeded. Max number of set timer event is over. The maximum number of settable timer conditions has been exceeded. Illegal start address. The start address is illegal. Illegal end address. The end address is illegal. Illegal bit address. The bit address is illegal. Specified read-protect I/O register. A read-protected I/O register has been specified. There is a phase which event are not in the middle. An event condition setting is missing from the middle of a phase. The same event is contained in Link and Disable. The same event condition is already being used. An event isn't specified. An event condition has not been set. Incompatible event is specified in phase 1. An incompatible event condition has been set in Phase 1. AND event is in Phase 1. Can't specify event with exception of phase 1. An AND condition event has already been set in Phase 1. Event conditions cannot be set anywhere except in Phase 1. REG/MEM event in Disable. The REG/MEM status event has been set to Disable. AND event is in Disable. The AND condition event has been set to Disable. Coverage mapping error. Coverage mapping could not be performed. Clear coverage? Do you want to clear the coverage? Illegal symbol. The symbol is illegal. Illegal value. The value is illegal. Illegal parameter. The parameter is illegal. f319 F f31a F f31b F f31d F f31e F f31f F f320 F f321 F f350 F f351 F f352 F f353 F f354 F f355 F f356 F f400 F f401 F f500 F f501 F f502 F User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 389 APPENDIX C ERROR MESSAGE LIST Table C-2. Error Message List (21/21) Error No. f600 F Type Error Message/Meaning Save project file? Do you want to save the project file? When connecting the target system, please turn on the target system. When connecting the target system, be sure to turn its power supply on. Download failed. Data could not be downloaded. Configuration of Memory Bank is not set. The memory bank setting has not been made. BANK address must be in target memory. The address of the memory bank must be inside the target memory. All events are deleted because the use of external probe was changed. All event conditions have been deleted because the external probe has changed. This event address is invalid on current configuration. The address of this event condition is illegal. Invalid PC value. The PC value is illegal. Cannot set temporary break on this address. A temporary break cannot be set to this address. External data is being used by Debugger. External data is being used by the debugger. Missing parameter. The name is illegal. Memory mapping error. There is a fault with the memory mapping. Illegal access size. The access size is illegal. Illegal access type. The access type is illegal. There is the same name. The same name cannot be registered. XXX is already exist. Do you replace it? Do you want to replace the existing XXX? Would you like to register the change made in XXX? Do you want to register the changes made to XXX? The "main( )" function of current program on PC position not found. The function "main( )" of the PC position program could not be found. The line information on PC position not found. The line information of the PC position could not be found. f601 W f700 F f800 F f801 F f802 F f803 F f804 F f805 F f806 F f900 F f901 F f902 F f903 F f904 F f905 W f906 W fa00 F fa01 F 390 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Efficient debugging can be realized by performing operations using the special function keys. Note that because the key explanations differ depending on the type of keyboard in IBM PC/AT and compatible machines, the key inscriptions employed here are general or generic key inscriptions. D.1 Special Function Key Function List A list of the special function key functions of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the table below. Table D-1. Special Function Key Function List (1/2) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles BackSpace . Deletes a character preceding the cursor and moves the cursor to the position of the deleted character. At this time, the string of characters following the cursor moves forward one space. * Deletes a character at the cursor position and moves the following characters forward one space. * Deletes the event conditions selected in the Event Manager and each event dialog box. * Deletes the data selected in the Watch window. Switches the modes between insert mode and overwrite mode in the Source and Assemble windows. However, this key is disabled in the Memory, Register, and SFR windows, where the input mode is overwrite mode only. Places the entire screen display on the clipboard as a bitmap image (Windows function). * Closes a pull-down menu. * Closes a modal dialog box. * Restores input data. Moves the cursor on the menu bar. Moves the cursor to the end of the line. Moves the cursor to the start of the line. Scrolls the screen up one screen. Simultaneously moves the cursor to the top of the screen. Scrolls the screen down one screen. Simultaneously moves the cursor to the top of the screen. Inserts a 1-character space. Moves the cursor to the next item. Moves the cursor up. When the cursor is at the top of the screen, the screen is scrolled down one line at a time. Function BS . DEL . Delete . INS . Insert . COPY . PrintScreen . ESC . Esc . GRPH . HELP . HOME CLR . ROLL DOWN . Alt . End . Home . PageUp . ROLL UP . PageDown . SPACE . TAB . . Space . Tab . . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 391 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Table D-1. Special Function Key Function List (2/2) Key Type PC-9821 Series . IBM PC/AT Compatibles . Moves the cursor down. When the cursor is at the bottom of the screen, the screen is scrolled up one line at a time. Moves the cursor to the left. When the cursor is on the far left of the screen, the screen is scrolled to the right one item at a time. Moves the cursor to the right. When the cursor is on the far right of the screen, the screen is scrolled to the left one item at a time. * Sets the input data. * Presses the default push button. Function . . . . . . D.2 Function Key Function List A list of the function key functions of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the table below. Table D-2. Function Key Function List (1/2) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles F1 . F2 . Opens the Help window. Forcibly stops program execution. The same function as [Run] [Stop] on the menu bar. Resets the emulation CPU. The same function as [Run] [CPU Reset] on the menu bar. Executes the program after resetting the emulation CPU. The same function as [Run] [Restart] on the menu bar. Executes the program. The same function as [Run] [Go & Go] on the menu bar. Executes the program as far as the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. The same function as [Run] [Come Here] on the menu bar. Executes the program in real-time until execution returns to the calling origin. The same function as [Run] [Return Out] on the menu bar. Performs step execution. The same function as [Run] [Step In] on the menu bar. Sets/cancels a breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. The same function as [Run] [Break Point] on the menu bar. Function f*1 . f*2 . f*3 . F3 . f*4 . F4 . f*5 . F5 . f*6 . F6 . f*7 . F7 . f*8 . F8 . f*9 . F9 . 392 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Table D-2. Function Key Function List (2/2) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles F10 . Performs next step execution. The same function as [Run] [Next Over] on the menu bar. Sets/cancels a software breakpoint. The same function as [Run] [Software Break Point] on the menu bar. Enables/disables a breakpoint. The same function as [Run] [Ignore Break Point] on the menu bar. Function f*10 . vf*1 . F11 . vf*2 . F12 . D.3 Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) A list of the special function key functions ( SHIFT + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the table below. Table D-3. Special Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles End . Home . . . Extends the selected range to the end of the line. Extends the selected range to the start of the line. Extends the selected range one character to the left. Extends the selected range one character to the right. Function HELP . HOME CLR . . . D.4 Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) A list of the function key functions ( SHIFT shown in the table below. Table D-4. Function Key Function List ( SHIFT + Key) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles F6 . Executes the program from the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. The same function as [Run] [Start From Here] on the menu bar. Function + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is f*6 . User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 393 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST D.5 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) A list of the special function key functions ( CTRL + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the table below. Table D-5. Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles End . Home . . . Displays the last line. Simultaneously moves the cursor to the start of the last line. Displays the first line. Simultaneously moves the cursor to the start of the first line. Moves the cursor one word to the left. When the cursor is on the far left of the screen, the screen is scrolled one item to the right. Moves the cursor one word to the right. When the cursor is on the far right of the screen, the screen is scrolled one item to the left. Function HELP . HOME CLR . . . D.6 Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) A list of the function key functions ( CTRL shown in the table below. Table D-6. Function Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles F9 . Sets the address of the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window in the PC. The same function as [Run] [Change PC] on the menu bar. Function + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is f*9 . D.7 Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) A list of the control key functions ( CTRL + key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and compatibles is shown in the table below. Table D-7. Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) (1/2) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles D. Shows a disassemble display from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Assemble window. The same function as [Jump] [Assemble] on the menu bar. Copies the selected character string and places it in the clipboard buffer. The same function as [Edit] [Copy] on the menu bar. Function C. 394 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Table D-7. Control Key Function List ( CTRL + Key) (2/2) Key Type PC-9821 Series IBM PC/AT Compatibles G. Performs a search. Opens the search dialog box appropriate to the current window. The same function as [View] [Search...] on the menu bar. Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Coverage window. The same function as [Jump] [Coverage] on the menu bar. Moves the display position. Opens the Source Move, Address Move, and Trace Move dialog box appropriate to the current window. The same function as [View] [Move...] on the menu bar. Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Memory window. The same function as [Jump] [Memory] on the menu bar. Loads a display, source, or text file. Opens the View File Load dialog box. Operations differ depending on the file extension. For display files: Displayed in corresponding window. For other files: Displayed in Source window. The same function as [File] [Open...] on the menu bar. Displays the corresponding source text and source line from the jump destination address of the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Source window. The same function as [Jump] [Source] on the menu bar. Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer at the cursor position. The same function as [Edit] [Paste] on the menu bar. Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box. The same function as [View] [Quick Watch...] on the menu bar. Removes the selected character string and places it on the clipboard buffer. The same function as [Edit] [Cut] on the menu bar. Function I. J. M. O. U. V. W. X. D.8 Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key) A list of the special function key functions ( CTRL compatibles is shown in the table below. Table D-8. Special Function Key Function List ( CTRL + SHIFT Key) Key Type PC-9821 Series . . IBM PC/AT Compatibles . . Extends the selected range one word to the left. Extends the selected range one word to the right. Function + SHIFT key) of the PC-9821 series and IBM PC/AT and User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 395 [MEMO] 396 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX E INDEX [A] About dialog box .................................................... 351 Add I/O Port dialog box.......................................... 218 Add Watch dialog box............................................ 204 Address ................................................................. 363 Address Move dialog box ...................................... 140 All trace.................................................................... 47 Assemble Search dialog box ................................. 176 Assemble window .................................................. 165 Automatic mode................................................60, 360 Detailed display mode ............................................ 266 Dialog box .............................................................. 368 Disassemble display .............................................. 165 Display file................................................................ 51 Displaying PC register value .......................... 153, 168 Displaying stack contents....................................... 235 DMM dialog box ..................................................... 339 Download dialog box .............................................. 128 Drag-and-drop function .................................. 159, 174 [E] Emulation board ....................................................... 21 Emulation execution functions.................................. 40 Emulation RAM ........................................................ 39 Emulation ROM ........................................................ 39 Error message list .................................................. 370 Error/Warning dialog box........................................ 354 Event condition......................................................... 43 Event detection break............................................... 45 Event dialog box..................................................... 276 Event function .......................................................... 42 Event link condition ................................................ 288 Event Link dialog box ............................................. 288 Event Manager....................................................... 264 Execution event...................................................... 279 Exit Debugger dialog box ....................................... 352 Exiting ...................................................................... 37 Explanation of windows............................................ 59 Expression and operator ........................................ 364 Extended Option dialog box ..................................... 97 Extended Tektronix HEX format..................... 128, 132 External sense clip ................................................. 282 [B] Bank Set dialog box................................................. 91 Break by Come function .......................................... 45 Break dialog box .................................................... 296 Break function.......................................................... 45 Break on satisfaction of condition during step execution.............................................................. 45 Breakpoint setting function .............................157, 172 Browse dialog box ................................................. 135 [C] Character set ......................................................... 366 Clearing coverage result........................................ 256 Come function ................................................157, 171 Conditional trace...................................................... 47 Configuration dialog box .......................................... 86 Coverage-Clear dialog box .................................... 256 Coverage-Condition Setting dialog box ................. 258 Coverage-Efficiency View dialog box..................... 261 Coverage measurement function............................. 50 Coverage Search dialog box ................................. 252 Coverage window .................................................. 247 Current file ............................................................. 361 Current function ..................................................... 361 Current program .................................................... 360 Current window...................................................... 360 [F] Fail-safe break ......................................................... 46 File ................................................................... 51, 360 Font dialog box....................................................... 109 Forced break ............................................................ 46 Function ................................................................. 361 [D] Debugger Option dialog box .................................. 101 Debugging environment..................................112, 115 Debugging with ID78K0-NS and ID78K0S-NS ...... 355 Delay Count dialog box.......................................... 347 Delimiter symbol .................................................... 360 [H] Host machine ........................................................... 21 IBM PC/AT or compatibles ................................... 21 PC-9821 series..................................................... 21 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 397 APPENDIX E INDEX PC98-NX series.................................................... 21 MS-DOS ...................................................................53 [I] In-circuit emulator .................................................... 21 IE-78K0-NS .......................................................... 21 IE-78K0-NS-A....................................................... 21 IE-78K0-NS-A....................................................... 21 IE-78K0S-NS........................................................ 21 IE-78K0S-NS-A .................................................... 21 In-circuit emulator optional board IE-780xxx-NS-EM1............................................... 21 IE-780xxx-NS-EM4............................................... 21 IE-78K0-NS-P0x................................................... 21 IE-78K0-NS-PA .................................................... 21 Information file ......................................................... 51 Instruction mode .............................................. 60, 360 Intel HEX format............................................. 128, 132 Interface board......................................................... 21 IE-70000-98-IF-C ................................................. 21 IE-70000-CD-IF-A ................................................ 21 IE-70000-PC-IF-C ................................................ 21 IE-70000-PCI-IF(-A) ............................................. 21 Internal RAM ............................................................ 39 Internal ROM............................................................ 39 I/O protect area ........................................................ 39 [N] NEC load module ...................................................128 Next step execution ............................................41, 62 Non-map break.........................................................46 Non real-time execution function ..............................41 Normal display mode......................150, 155, 232, 289 Numeric value ........................................................362 [O] Operating environment .............................................21 Operation of trace.....................................................47 Operator .................................................................364 OS Windows 95, 98, 2000, NT4.0...............................21 [P] Pass Count dialog box............................................345 Performance board...................................................21 Point mark display area ..........................151, 166, 228 Program..................................................................360 Program counter setting function....................158, 172 Project file...........................................51, 86, 113, 116 Project File Load dialog box ...................................112 Project File Save dialog box ...................................115 Project Manager .......................................................53 [J] Jump function................. 158, 172, 182, 225, 233, 250 [Q] Qualify trace ...........................................................308 Quick Watch dialog box..........................................200 Quick watch function ......................................159, 173 [L] Line ........................................................................ 361 List display mode ................................................... 266 Load/save function................................................... 51 Local Variable window ........................................... 221 [R] Real-time execution function ....................................40 [M] Main window ............................................................ 60 Mapping function...................................................... 39 Mask Option dialog box ........................................... 95 Measuring execution time ...................................... 327 Memory Compare dialog box ................................. 191 Memory Compare Result dialog box...................... 193 Memory Copy dialog box ....................................... 189 Memory Fill dialog box ........................................... 187 Memory manipulation............................................... 52 Memory Search dialog box .................................... 184 Memory window ..................................................... 179 Mixed display mode ............................... 150, 155, 232 Motorola HEX format ............................................. 128 Real-time RAM sampling function ............................52 Register manipulation...............................................52 Register name ........................................................361 Register window .....................................................207 Registering link condition........................................288 Reset Debugger dialog box ....................................349 [S] Select mode ...........................................................289 Setting external sense data condition.....................282 Setting operating environment..................................86 SFR illegal access break ..........................................46 SFR select dialog box.............................................215 SFR window ...........................................................211 398 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 APPENDIX E INDEX Snap Shot dialog box............................................. 313 Snapshot function .................................................... 50 Software break ........................................................ 45 Software Break Manager ....................................... 273 Source mode ....................................................60, 360 Source Move dialog box ........................................ 137 Source Search dialog box...................................... 162 Source window ...................................................... 149 Specifying address ................................................ 141 Stack frame number .......................................224, 361 Stack window......................................................... 223 Start function ..................................................157, 171 Starting .................................................................... 35 Status condition ..................................................... 279 Status display area .................................................. 64 Step execution................................................... 41, 61 Structure ................................................................ 361 Symbol................................................................... 363 Symbol To Address dialog box .............................. 146 System register........................................................ 52 Window link function ...................... 155, 182, 234, 250 Window list ............................................................... 57 Window types and configuration ............................ 368 Windows................................................................... 19 Write-protect break............................................. 39, 46 [T] Term ...................................................................... 366 Time measurement function .................................... 52 Time tag display .................................................... 230 Timer dialog box .................................................... 327 Timer Result dialog box ......................................... 337 Toolbar .................................................................... 61 Trace condition setting function ............................... 48 Trace Data Select dialog box................................. 244 Trace dialog box .................................................... 303 Trace function.......................................................... 47 Trace mode ............................................................. 47 Trace Move dialog box .......................................... 143 Trace result display function .................................... 49 Trace Search dialog box........................................ 236 Trace View window................................................ 227 [U] Upload dialog box .................................................. 132 User area mapping .................................................. 39 [V] View File Load dialog box...................................... 119 View File Save dialog box...................................... 122 [W] Watch function................................................159, 173 Watch window ....................................................... 195 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 399 [MEMO] 400 User's Manual U14910EJ1V0UM00 Facsimile Message From: Name Company Although NEC has taken all possible steps to ensure that the documentation supplied to our customers is complete, bug free and up-to-date, we readily accept that errors may occur. Despite all the care and precautions we've taken, you may encounter problems in the documentation. Please complete this form whenever you'd like to report errors or suggest improvements to us. Tel. FAX Address Thank you for your kind support. North America Hong Kong, Philippines, Oceania NEC Electronics Inc. NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. Corporate Communications Dept. Fax: +852-2886-9022/9044 Fax: 1-800-729-9288 1-408-588-6130 Korea Europe NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd. NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH Seoul Branch Technical Documentation Dept. Fax: 02-528-4411 Fax: +49-211-6503-274 South America NEC do Brasil S.A. Fax: +55-11-6462-6829 Taiwan NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd. Fax: 02-2719-5951 Asian Nations except Philippines NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd. Fax: +65-250-3583 Japan NEC Semiconductor Technical Hotline Fax: 044-435-9608 I would like to report the following error/make the following suggestion: Document title: Document number: Page number: If possible, please fax the referenced page or drawing. Document Rating Clarity Technical Accuracy Organization CS 00.6 Excellent Good Acceptable Poor |
Price & Availability of ID78K0S-NS
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |